Contents

BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal PDF

1 of 246
1 of 246

Summary of Content for BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal PDF

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

323i 325i

325xi 330i

330xi

Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

2006 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 012 355 US English II/06, 05 09 510 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic- ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 226.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 6 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 22 Voice command system

Controls 28 Opening and closing 40 Adjustments 49 Transporting children safely 52 Driving 69 Everything under control 83 Technology for driving comfort and

safety 93 Lamps 97 Climate 103 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 116 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 124 Starting the navigation system 125 Destination entry 136 Destination guidance 141 What to do if

Entertainment 144 On/off and settings 148 Radio 156 CD player and CD changer 162 External audio device

Communications 166 Telephoning 178 TeleService, BMW Assist

Mobility 186 Refueling 188 Wheels and tires 198 Under the hood 203 Maintenance 205 Replacing components 211 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 218 Technical data 222 Short commands for the voice command

system 226 Everything from A-Z

N o

te s

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehi- cle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW Center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

5

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The individual vehicle When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari- ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip- ment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repair Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electron-

ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle per- formed only by your BMW Center or at a work- shop that works according to BMW repair pro- cedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop- erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW Centers.

Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim- ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage

N o

te s

6

to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW Center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

7

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele- phone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

C o

ck p

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

3 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 45

1 Safety switch for electric rear windows 38

2 Opening and closing windows 37

4 Parking lamps 93

Low beams 93

Automatic headlamp control* 93 Adaptive Head Light* 95

5 Fog lamps* 95

A t

a g

la n

ce

11

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

7 Instrument cluster 12

10 Ignition lock 52

11 Buttons* on the steering wheel

12 Horn: the entire surface

13 Steering wheel adjustment 47

15 Releasing the hood 198

16 Opening the luggage compartment lid*

6 Turn signals 58

High beams, headlamp flasher 95

Roadside parking lamps* 95

Computer 70

Settings and information about the vehicle 73

Instrument lighting 96

8 Windshield wipers 59

Rain sensor* 59

9 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 52

Telephone*:

> Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* for a selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

> Press longer: redialing

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice com- mand system* 22

Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable 47

Individually programmable 47

14 Cruise control* 60

Active cruise control* 62

C o

ck p

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Displays for active cruise control* 62

5 Tachometer 69

6 Energy Control 70

7 Display for

> Clock 69

> Outside temperature 69

> Indicator and warning lamps 79

8 Display for

> Position of automatic transmission* 57

> Sequential manual gearbox SMG* 55

> Computer 70

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 74

> Odometer and trip odometer 69

> Checking engine oil level* 199

> Settings and information 73

9 Fuel gauge 70

10 Resetting trip odometer 69

A t

a g

la n

ce

13

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var- ious combinations and colors in both the indica- tor area 1 and the display 2.

Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 79.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown immediately as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps in the indicator area 1 signal that the associated functions are activated:

High beams/headlamp flasher 95

Fog lamps* 95

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propul- sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 85

Handbrake engaged 54

C o

ck p

it

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

A t

a g

la n

ce

15

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

1 Microphone for voice command system* and for telephone in hands-free mode*

2 Initiating an emergency call* 3 Reading lamps 96

4 Glass sunroof, electric* 38

5 Interior lamps 96

6 Passenger airbag status lamp* 92

7 Control Display 16

8 Hazard warning flashers

9 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 85

10 Central locking system 32

11 Automatic climate control

12 Ejecting

> Audio CD 144

> Navigation DVD 124

13 Changing

> Radio station 148

> Track 157

15 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon- tally in four directions

16 Activating voice command system* 22

17 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

18 Drive for navigation DVD 124

19 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust- ing volume 144

20 Drive for audio CDs 144

Air distribution to the windshield 98

Air distribution to the upper body area 98

Air distribution to the footwell 98

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 98

Cooling function 100

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 99

Recirculated-air mode 99

Maximum cooling 98

Residual heat mode 99

Air flow rate 99

Defrosting windows 100

Rear window defroster 100

14 Heated seats* 43

PDC Park Distance Control* 83

Roller sun blind* 106

Hill Descent Control HDC* 86

iD ri

ve

16

iDrive

iDrive integrates the functions of a large num- ber of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to

basic menu navigation. The control of the indi- vidual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

1 Control Display

2 button Opening start menu

3 Controller The controller can be used to select menu items and to adjust settings:

> Move in four directions, arrow 4

> Turn, arrow 5

> Push, arrow 6

Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid

endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

A t

a g

la n

ce

17

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Menu overview

Communication > Telephone* > BMW Assist* or TeleService*

Navigation > Navigation system

> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the average fuel consumption.

Entertainment > Radio

> CD player and CD changer* > External audio device

Climate > Air distribution

> Automatic program

> Parked car ventilation

menu > Switching off Control Display

> Tone and display settings

> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system

> Display of service requirements and dates for statutory emissions and vehicle inspec- tions

> Settings for telephone

Operating principle As of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:

Confirm the message by pressing the control- ler. This opens the start menu.

Start menu

All iDrive functions can be called up via five menu items.

Opening start menu Press the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.

iD ri

ve

18

Calling up menu items in the start menu

As of radio readiness, refer to page 52: Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain- ment and Climate by moving the controller for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right. Depending on your selection, the menu last called up will be shown.

You can call up the menu by pressing the con- troller.

Convenient call-up of menu items The convenient call-up function enables you to:

> Call up a menu item from the start menu in the view last displayed

> Switch directly between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without having to press the button

To do so, move the controller in the corre- sponding direction and hold it for more than approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in menu

1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The active field is highlighted.

2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last selected.

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- tal or vertical lists.

2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.

3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values.

Communication

Navigation or onboard information

Entertainment

Climate

menu

A t

a g

la n

ce

19

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Operating principle at a glance The following is a general description of opera- tions using iDrive.

For an exemplary step-by-step application refer to Setting the time, page 77.

1 Select a menu item:

> Turn the controller; the highlight marker moves

> Menu items in white can be selected by highlighting them

2 To activate a menu item:

> Press the controller

> New menu items are displayed or the function is executed

3 Select a menu item: refer to 1

4 To switch between fields:

> Briefly move the controller to the left, right, forward, or backward

> Release the controller

> The active field is brighter in color

5 To adjust settings:

> Turn the controller

> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed

> Confirm by changing the field

iD ri

ve

20

Status information

1 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD or

> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of the connected mobile phone, network search or no network

> "BMW Assist"*: Active voice connection with a BMW Assist service

2 Entertainment audio output off

3 Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"* > Roaming active

4 It is possible to make calls* if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle

Reception strength of mobile phone network, depending on mobile phone

5 Time

Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice command system*.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the assistance window:

> The computer or the trip computer* > The arrow or map view in vehicles with nav-

igation system* > The current position*

Selecting display 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.

A t

a g

la n

ce

21

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Switching assistance window on/off 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.

To turn back on, switch to the assistance win- dow and press the controller.

Switching Control Display on/ off 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control- ler.

Press the controller to switch on.

V o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

22

Voice command system

The concept The voice command system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not neces- sary to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 15.

Precondition Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice command system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 82.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Saying commands

Activating voice command system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the center console.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice command system is ready to receive spo- ken commands.

2. Say the command. The command appears on the Control Dis- play.

This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands.

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice command system.

A t

a g

la n

ce

23

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console or

Commands

Having the possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi- ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display. To have the possible commands read out to you:

For instance, if you have selected "CD", the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer are read out.

Opening help

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Calling up functions immediately via short commands Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 222.

Opening the start menu

Example: selecting a track 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio

output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.

{Cancel}.

{Options}

{Help}

{Settings menu} or {i menu}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment}. The system says: {{Entertainment}}.

4. {CD}. The system says: {{CD on}}.

V o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

24

5. Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.

Notes For information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate

Owner's Manual.<

For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:

> Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destina- tion for navigation.

> Always speak the commands in the lan- guage of the voice command system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.

> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia- tions

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

6. Select a track, e.g.: {Track 1}. The system says: {{Track 1}}.

A t

a g

la n

ce

25

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for

driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote controls

1 Remote control with integrated key

2 Spare key

3 Adapter for spare key, in the glove compart- ment

Remote control with integrated key Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use the remote control at least twice a year in order to keep the batteries charged. In cars equipped with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 37.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per- sonal Profile, page 29.

In addition, information about service require- ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 203.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Glove compartment, refer to page 106

> Driver's door, refer to page 32

> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33

New remote controls Your BMW Center can supply new remote con- trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Spare key Spare key for storage in a safe place, such as in your wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and the integrated key fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key The adapter is necessary for starting the car with the spare key or switching on radio readi- ness.

C o

n tr

o ls

29

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Take the adapter out of the bracket on the inside of the glove compartment and slide the spare key into the adapter before using it.

Personal Profile

The concept You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro- file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the set- tings stored for it are called up and imple- mented.

This means that your personal settings are active when you return to your BMW, even if the car was used in the meantime by someone else with a remote control of their own and the set- tings were changed accordingly.

You can configure a maximum of three remote controls for three different people. The prereq- uisite for this is that each person has his or her own remote control.

Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 30

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 32

> Automatic call-up* of the driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions after unlocking, refer to page 44

> Functions assigned to the programmable buttons* on the steering wheel, refer to page 47

> 12h/24h mode of the clock, refer to page 78

> Date format, refer to page 79

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 82

> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 82

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, dis- tance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 73

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con- trol PDC*, refer to page 83

> Automatic climate control: AUTO program, activating/deactivating cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control, setting temperature, air flow rate and distribution, refer to page 98 ff

> Audio volume, refer to page 145

> Tone control, refer to page 145

> Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 145

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system is ready for opera- tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Luggage compartment lid

> Fuel filler door

Operating from outside > Via the remote control

> Via the door lock

> In cars with convenient access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passen- ger's doors

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

30

The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The interior lamp and the courtesy lamps* are also switched on or off with the remote con- trol. The alarm system* is also armed or dis- armed. For further details of the alarm system,refer to page 34.

Operating from inside By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 32.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- rior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from outside

Using the remote control Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you so that the car can be opened from the out- side.<

Unlocking Press the button. The interior lamp and the doors' courtesy lamps* come on. Exterior mirrors that were folded in are automatically folded back out*.

You can also set the way in which the car is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

6. Select "Unlock button" and press the con- troller.

7. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

8. Press the controller.

Convenience opening Hold the button down. The electric windows and the glass sunroof* are opened.

Locking Press the button.

Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked: Press the button.

C o

n tr

o ls

31

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode* You can also trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation:

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlocking the luggage compartment lid Press the button for a longer period.

The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance in all directions

before opening the luggage compartment lid. A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing. Before and after each trip, check that the lug- gage compartment lid has not been inadvert- ently unlocked.<

Setting confirmation signals You can program the vehicle to confirm when it has been locked or unlocked.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- troller.

6. Select the desired signal.

7. Press the controller. The signal is activated.

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis- charged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 28.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

32

Using the door lock

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 30.

Convenient operation You can also operate the windows and glass sunroof via the door lock. Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Releasing the

key stops the operation.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key or the spare key to the corre- sponding limit positions in the door lock.

Opening and closing: from inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti- vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.

You can also set the situations in which the car locks:

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

6. Select a menu item:

> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.

> "Lock after driving" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.

7. Press the controller. The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

C o

n tr

o ls

33

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you so that the car can be opened from the out- side.<

Luggage compartment lid In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance in all directions

before opening the luggage compartment lid.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The lug-

gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

The integrated key of the remote control and the spare key, refer to page 28, fit the luggage compartment lid lock.

Opening manually Turn the integrated key of the remote control or the spare key all the way to the left: the luggage compartment lid opens.

If you unlock and open the luggage com- partment lid with the key while the alarm

system is armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off an alarm, refer to page 34.<

Locking or unlocking separately

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the luggage compartment lid

2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid

Locking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1. The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system. If you give the remote control without the inte- grated key to someone else while the glove

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

34

compartment is locked, the luggage compart- ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan- tage when valet parking, for example.

Unlocking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the luggage compartment. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Closing

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear, other-

wise injuries may result.<

Alarm system*

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> When a door, the hood or the luggage com- partment lid is opened

> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior motion sensor, refer to the information fur- ther below

> When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away

> When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery

The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of:

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on the hazard warning flashers

> Flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Even when the alarm system is armed, you can open the luggage compartment lid by means of the button on the remote control, refer to page 31. When you subsequently close the lug- gage compartment lid, it is again locked and monitored.

Switching off an alarm > Unlock the car with the remote control, refer

to page 30, or

> insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp under the inside rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.

C o

n tr

o ls

35

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to mon- itor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sen- sor is not activated.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.

> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof must be completely closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre- vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In duplex garages

> When transporting on car-carrying trains

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control twice in a row.

The indicator lamp comes on for approx. two seconds, then begins to flash steadily. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Convenient access* Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote con- trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passen- ger compartment.

Convenient access supports the following functions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately

> Engine starting

> Convenient closure

Functional requirement > The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid

can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.

> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control cur- rently in use is inside the vehicle.

Special features in comparison to conventional remote controls In general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28.

Special features regarding the use of conve- nient access are described below.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

36

Unlocking

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas- senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre- sponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control is detected inside the car after the vehicle is unlocked, the electric steer- ing wheel lock is released, refer to page 52.

Locking Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button.

For convenient closure, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.

If the vehicle detects that a remote con- trol has been accidentally left inside the

locked vehicle's luggage compartment after the luggage compartment lid is closed, the luggage compartment lid will reopen slightly. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.<

Unlocking just the luggage compartment lid Press the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Switching on radio readiness Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 52.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start immedi-

ately.<

Starting the engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition switch, refer to page 52.

Switching off the engine in vehicles with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 54. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition switch.

Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash 1. Insert remote control into ignition switch.

2. Depress the brake.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con- trol or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

C o

n tr

o ls

37

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the battery The remote control for convenient access con- tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 28.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac- ing up.

4. Press the cover on to close.

Take the old battery to a battery collec- tion point or to your BMW Center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut. Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure them- selves.<

Opening, closing

> Press the switch to the resistance point. The window continues to open as long as you keep the switch pressed.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

There are separate switches in the rear seat armrests.

After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 30 or 32. For information on closing with conve- nient access, refer to Locking on page 30.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children

could operate the electric windows and possi- bly injure themselves.<

Anti-trapping mechanism If the closing force exceeds a specific value as an electric window closes, the closing action is interrupted immediately and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the anti-trapping mechanism check and clear the window's travel path

prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

38

tions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Pulling the switch beyond the resistance point and holding it limits the response of the anti- trapping mechanism. In this case, if the closing force exceeds a defined threshold, the window will only open a few fractions of an inch/a few millimeters. If the switch is pulled past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds, the anti-trap- ping mechanism will be deactivated.<

Safety switch

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, by chil- dren, for example. When the safety function is switched on, the LED comes on.

Always press the safety switch when chil- dren ride in the rear, otherwise

unchecked closing of the windows could lead to injuries.<

Accessories in a window area If you install accessories within the power win- dow movement range, e.g. a clip-on antenna for your mobile phone, the system must be initial- ized to teach it the new conditions. BMW rec- ommends having this work done by your BMW Center.

Glass sunroof*, electric To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is shut. Take the remote control with you when you

leave the car, otherwise children could operate the sunroof and possibly injure themselves.<

Raising Press the switch.

> The closed glass sunroof is raised and the sliding visor is opened slightly.

> When the glass sunroof is open, it automat- ically travels into the raised position. The sliding visor remains completely open.

Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the raised position, otherwise

this could damage the mechanism.<

Opening, closing > Press the switch backwards to the resis-

tance point. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.

> Press the switch backwards past the resis- tance point. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass sunroof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on convenient operation via the remote control or door lock, refer to page 30 or 32.

After the ignition is switched off When the remote control has been removed or the ignition switched off, you can still operate

C o

n tr

o ls

39

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

the glass sunroof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Anti-trapping mechanism If the glass sunroof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass sunroof is opened again slightly.

Despite the anti-trapping mechanism check and clear the sunroof's travel path

prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc- tions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would continue closing. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point and holding it there deactivates the anti- trapping mechanism.<

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power failure, there is a possibility that the sunroof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW Center.

Closing manually In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass sunroof manually:

1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 205.

2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on each side to press the clips.

3. Remove the control unit.

4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.

5. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the onboard tool kit, refer to page 205, into the opening provided. Move the glass sunroof in the desired direction.

6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the lamp cover.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

40

Adjustments

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- junction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys- tems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 49.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing is to come between the air- bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, e.g. not resting feet or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbags, other- wise serious injuries could result if the side air- bags suddenly deployed.<

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 90.

Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 42.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Expectant mothers should also wear the safety belt, making sure that the strap in the pelvic area is well down on the hips and does not press against the abdominal region of the body. Do not route the belt across your neck, or run it across sharp edges. Be sure that the belt does not become caught or jammed. The safety belt should not be twisted and must be positioned firmly over the pelvis and shoulder, as close to the body as possible. It should not pass over hard or fragile objects, otherwise the belt in the pelvic area could slide over the hips in the event of a head-on collision and injure the lower abdo- men. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, other- wise its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Safety belts, refer to page 45.

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the

C o

n tr

o ls

41

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan- ger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor- mally provided by the belt.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 42, and on damaged safety belts on page 45.

Seat adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions on page 40 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop- erly.

Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back- rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: push switch forward or back.

> Shift curvature up or down: push switch up or down.

Electric seat adjustment* Comply with the adjusting instructions mentioned above to ensure the best pos-

sible personal protection.<

A d

ju st

m en

ts

42

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints below.

Sports seat* On this seat, you can manually adjust the thigh support, the tilt angle and the width of the back- rest.

Thigh support

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for- ward or back.

Angle

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest width

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat- eral-support pads.

Push switch forward or back. Backrest width decreases or increases accord- ingly.

Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

C o

n tr

o ls

43

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Front seats

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing 1. Pull up all the way.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Rear seats

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

The center head restraint is not height-adjust- able.

Removing 1. Pull up all the way.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out. With through-loading system: Fold the rear-

seat backrest slightly forward before pulling out a head restraint.

Folding the center head restraint down and up

Folding down: Press the button, arrow 1.

Folding up: Pull the head restraint.

Depending on the equipment version, it may be possible to fold the outer rear head restraints down and up as well.

Note that it is an offense to drive with the rear seats occupied and the rear head

restraints folded down. Fold up the head restraints before allowing passengers to occupy the rear seats.<

Heated seats*

Press once for each temperature level. Three lamps indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off: Press button longer.

If you continue driving within the next 15 min- utes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

44

Seat and mirror memory* You can store and call up two different combi- nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.

Settings for the seat back width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 52.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory key 1 or 2. The LED goes out.

The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi- tions are stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Automatic call-up You can select at what occasion the stored positions of the driver's seat and exterior mir- rors are to be called up.

> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked

> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first ensure that the footwell behind

the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The adjusting procedure is immediately halted when you press a seat adjustment switch or one of the MEMORY buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Door locks" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

6. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con- troller.

7. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".

8. Press the controller.

Switching off automatic call-up Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

Manual call-up Do not call up memory while you are driv- ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-

ment could result in an accident.<

C o

n tr

o ls

45

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Convenience mode 1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio readiness, refer to page 52.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is immediately halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the MEMORY buttons.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off, refer to page 52.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally: press the button again; the LED goes out.

Safety belts Observe the adjustment instructions on page 40 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

On the rear seats, the center belt buckle marked with the letters CENTER is solely intended for the center passenger.

Closing Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- erly, refer to page 40.

Opening 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats

The indicator lamp comes on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display. Check whether the safety

belt has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas- tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is not fastened, if heavy objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front pas- senger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-

tem, including any belt tensioners, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW Center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Other- wise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will function properly.<

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; other- wise there is an increased risk of an accident.<

A d

ju st

m en

ts

46

1 Adjustments

2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*

3 Folding mirrors in and out* The positions of the exterior mirrors are stored for the remote control currently used*, refer to Personal Profile, page 29.

Manual adjustment The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle from being damaged, always fold

them in by hand before entering an automatic car wash.<

Automatic heating* At outside temperatures below a certain limit, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Passenger-side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor*

Activating 1. Push the switch to the position for the

driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever to position R. The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, such as a curb, when parking, etc.

Deactivating Push the switch to the position for the passen- ger-side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head- lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.

Automatically dimming mirrors, refer to page 117.

C o

n tr

o ls

47

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Steering wheel

Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, or an accident

may result from any unexpected movement.<

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi- tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Electric steering wheel lock The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati- cally when the remote control is removed or inserted, refer to page 52.

Programmable buttons on the steering wheel You can program the buttons to suit your per- sonal preferences:

These settings are stored for the remote con- trol currently in use.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Steering wheel buttons" is selected and press the controller.

A list showing various functions is dis- played:

> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice messages from the navigation system

> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanent shut-off of outside air, refer to Automatic recirculated-air control AUC on page 99

> "Mute on / off" To mute the audio sources

> "Monitor on / off" To switch Control Display on/off

> "Telephone list" To show/hide phone book or last dis- played list of stored phone numbers

> "Next entertainment source" To change the audio source

5. Select the desired function and press the controller.

A d

ju st

m en

ts

48

6. Select a button, if appropriate, and press the controller.

You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.

Operating a function Briefly press the appropriate button on the steering wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:

> Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period

> To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button briefly

> To cancel a voice instruction during an announcement: Press the button briefly

C o

n tr

o ls

49

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger

themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

The rear center seat is not suitable for installing universal child-restraint systems for all age groups, approved for the age group in question.

Children always in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seats.

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only

in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth- erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

All rear seats in your vehicle meet the recom- mendations of the SAE J1819 standard for safely mounting child-restraint systems in motor vehicles.

Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child- restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti- vated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will be at an increased risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child-restraint sys- tem. Your BMW Center will be glad to advise you.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 91.

Installing child-restraint systems

Observe the child-restraint system man- ufacturer's instructions for selecting,

installing and using child-restraint systems. Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin- ished.<

Standard child-restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child-restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger's seat Before installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger's seat, make sure

that the front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<

Seat height Before installing a universal child-restraint sys- tem, move the front passenger's seat up as far as it will go to ensure that the safety belt will be ideally positioned. Do not change the seat height afterward.

Backrest width The backrest width of the front passenger seat must be adjusted to its widest set-

ting, otherwise the stability of the child seat on the front passenger seat is limited.<

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set- ting, refer to page 42.

2. Install the child seat.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

50

Child seat security

All rear safety belts and the front passenger's safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt 1. Secure the child-restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle

2. Remove the child-restraint system.

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

Child-restraint system with tether strap

There are three additional anchors for child- restraint systems with tether straps, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

Fold the anchors upward before using them.

1. Push the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the tether strap through the mount- ing for the head restraint.

3. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

LATCH child-restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil- dren.

When installing a LATCH child seat, com- ply with the system manufacturer's oper-

ating and safety instructions.<

Rear seats with through-loading system

The anchor points for the LATCH child- restraint fixing system are located behind the indicated protective caps. Flip up the corre- sponding caps.

C o

n tr

o ls

51

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Rear seats without through-loading system

The anchor points for the LATCH child- restraint fixing system can be found at the loca- tions marked by the arrows. They are not visible from the outside.

On journeys

Child-safety locks for rear doors

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for power windows Press the safety switch for the power windows, refer to page 38, if children are traveling on the rear seat.

D ri

vi n

g

52

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

> Radio readiness switches on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

> The electric steering wheel lock disen- gages audibly.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock before you move the vehicle, other-

wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis- engage and you will not be able to steer the car.<

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock Press the remote control in briefly; it is ejected part of the way.

At the same time:

> The ignition switches off if it was on before- hand.

> The electric steering wheel lock engages audibly.

Automatic transmission You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

Each time the start/stop button is pressed, radio readiness or the ignition is switched on or off.

Briefly pressing the start/stop button while the brake or clutch is depressed

starts the engine.<

Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are dis- played in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> Immediately when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> In cars with convenient access*, by touch- ing the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 36

Ignition on Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the indicator area 1 of the instrument cluster, refer to page 13, light up and remain on for different lengths of time.

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps in the instru- ment cluster go out.

C o

n tr

o ls

53

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Starting the engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhaling of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre- sents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in idle or move the selector lever to position P and apply the hand- brake to prevent the car from moving.<

When starting the engine, do not press the accelerator pedal.

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive immediately at a moder- ate engine speed.

Do not depress either the brake or the clutch until you are ready to start the

engine. The engine is started immediately when you briefly touch the start/stop button and depress the brake if the car has automatic transmission, or the clutch if the car has manual transmission.<

Manual transmission 1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.

3. Briefly press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic transmission 1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P.

3. Briefly press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Sequential manual gearbox SMG* 1. Depress the brake.

2. Engage selector lever position N and make sure that this position is displayed in the instrument cluster.

3. Start the engine.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, depress the brake and push the selector lever to the

right, then engage position N. Observe the dis- play in the instrument cluster while doing so.<

Special starting conditions In the following situations, press the accelerator pedal halfway down when starting the engine:

> If the engine does not start on the first attempt, for instance when it is extremely hot or cold.

> If the engine is started at very low tempera- tures, below approx. + 57/156, at high altitudes above approx. 3,300 ft/1,000 m.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the cat- alytic converter.<

Switching off the engine Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking on a downhill incline, apply the

D ri

vi n

g

54

handbrake, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.<

Manual transmission 1. Apply the handbrake.

2. With the car at a standstill, briefly press the start/stop button.

3. Shift into first gear or reverse.

Automatic transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

2. Briefly press the start/stop button.

3. Apply the handbrake.

Sequential manual gearbox SMG 1. Apply the handbrake.

2. Engage a drive position.

3. Briefly press the start/stop button.

If the engine is switched off while N is engaged, this will be signaled visually and acoustically.

Handbrake The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The handbrake is still applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do not

pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continu- ously press the button of the handbrake lever. Otherwise, too violent an application of the handbrake can overbrake the rear axle and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally apply the hand-

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the hand- brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise

the engine could be damaged if you inadvert- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

C o

n tr

o ls

55

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Sequential manual gearbox SMG*

The concept The sequential manual gearbox SMG is an automated transmission in which operation of the clutch and gearshifts are performed by an electro-hydraulic system.

SMG is operated via the selector lever in the center console and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

It offers you the following functions:

> Choice of manual or automatic operation: sequential mode or Drive mode

> Choice of two driving programs: Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driving Control, page 56

> Automatic downshifting and prevention of misshifting in sequential mode as well

> Acceleration assistant, refer to page 57

Selector lever positions

The current selector lever position can be seen on the center console.

> R: Reverse gear

> N: Neutral, idle

> One-touch functions for sequential mode: +: manual upshifting : manual downshifting

> D: Drive mode or sequential mode

N is automatically selected when the driver's door is opened while the engine is

running, as long as the pedals, shift paddles and selector lever are not operated. This is indicated by an acoustic signal and a flashing N in the instrument cluster.<

Gear indicator

R N 1 to 6

The gear currently engaged is displayed, pre- ceded by a D in Drive mode.

This indicator is the only way you can confirm whether or not the desired selec-

tor lever position is engaged.<

Shiftlock Before moving the lever away from N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; oth- erwise the desired gearshift will not be carried out.

R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

Gear-change mode The gears can be changed in two different ways.

> Sequential mode Gears are shifted by means of the shift pad- dles or the selector lever.

> D Drive mode All forward gears are shifted automatically.

You can switch from one mode to the other by pressing the selector lever towards the right in the direction of D.

D ri

vi n

g

56

Sequential mode After every engine start, sequential mode is activated when you press the selector lever towards the right while the brake is depressed.

You can shift up or down using the shift paddles or the selector lever. You do not need to lift your foot from the accelerator pedal while doing so.

It is also possible to start off in second gear, e.g. on slippery surfaces.

SMG assists you in the following situations:

> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combina- tion of engine and vehicle speed; for exam- ple, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev cannot be executed by the system.

> The system shifts down into first gear auto- matically when the vehicle comes to a stop.

> The system shifts down automatically just before the engine speed falls below the minimum speed required for a certain gear; the driver does not need to intervene.

Shifting gears via selector lever > Pull the selector lever backwards to shift up.

> Push it forward to shift down.

Shifting gears via the shift paddles on the steering wheel

> Pull one of the shift paddles to shift up.

> Press it to shift down.

D Drive mode In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.

To switch from sequential mode to Drive mode: press the selector lever towards the right in the direction of D.

Kick-down: to accelerate rapidly, e.g. when passing another vehicle, depress the accelera- tor pedal all the way. You will achieve maximum acceleration.

To switch back to sequential mode: press the selector lever again towards the right in the direction of D or shift gears via the shift paddles or the selector lever.

On uphill slopes, drive off without delay. Do not hold the vehicle in place by

depressing the accelerator pedal; engage the handbrake instead. Otherwise, the transmis- sion could overheat.<

Dynamic Driving Control Dynamic Driving Control enables you to drive your BMW in an even more performance-ori- ented manner at the touch of a button:

> Gears are shifted more quickly.

> In Drive mode, the engine speed range is utilized optimally.

Activating the system

Press the SPORT button while the ignition is switched on. The LED in the button lights up.

Deactivating the system > Press the SPORT button again or

> engage reverse gear or

> switch off the engine.

The LED in the button goes out.

C o

n tr

o ls

57

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Acceleration assistant The acceleration assistant provides for optimal, racing-style acceleration when starting off on a non-slippery surface.

Do not use the acceleration assistant too frequently, otherwise components could

wear prematurely.<

1. Activate Dynamic Driving Control.

2. Deactivate DSC, refer to page 85.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal all the way: kick-down. The optimal engine speed for pulling away is achieved.

To maintain driving stability, reactivate DSC afterward.<

Automatic transmission with Steptronic* In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 58.

Vehicle parking To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the

handbrake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Disengaging the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in the instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions > With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P: interlock.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag- ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, refer to arrow.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

D ri

vi n

g

58

R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral, idle You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con- sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi- tion D.

Kick-down Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full- throttle resistance point.

Manual operation and Sport program M/S

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot: The sport program is activated and DS appears in the instrument cluster. This position is rec- ommended for a performance-oriented driving style. When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. The instrument clus- ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The

gear selected appears briefly in the instrument cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.

To use the automatic function again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Overriding selector lever lock Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P although the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 205, press the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position.

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signals

C o

n tr

o ls

59

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator

has failed. After switching off the ignition, make sure that the roadside parking lamps are not switched on.<

Indicating a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and press the controller.

Triple turn signaling is activated.

Wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-

sitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once.

The system switches to operation in the inter- mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

D ri

vi n

g

60

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press button 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Slide switch 5 up or down.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press button 3 again. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before enter- ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do

so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps* Pull lever 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Always keep it well away from sparks and

open flames, and store it in the tightly closed original container, well out of the reach of chil- dren. Comply with the instructions on the con- tainer.<

Washer fluid reservoir

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure

the correct concentration is maintained.<

Capacity Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept Cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column. In order to maintain the specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle when the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.

Do not use cruise control when driving conditions are unfavorable for driving at a

constant speed. Otherwise you could lose con- trol of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result. Unfavorable driving conditions include, for example, winding roads, heavy traffic or a

C o

n tr

o ls

61

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

poor road surface, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose material.<

Manual transmission/SMG You can shift gears while cruise control is acti- vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.

In Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an automatic transmission in position D.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat- ing

2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler- ating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Maintaining current speed Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and main- tained. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys- tem will brake the vehicle slightly.

Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly:

Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerating significantly:

Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing desired speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.

The system stores and maintains the speed.

If the speed is to be reduced significantly, depress the brake; otherwise, decelera-

tion may be insufficient and dangerous situa- tions could result.<

Deactivating cruise control Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

D ri

vi n

g

62

> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission

> When you select the automatic transmis- sion's/SMG's neutral position N

> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

Warning lamp The warning lamp comes on when cruise control has been automatically deactivated by engaging the hand-

brake or as a result of DSC intervening. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand Briefly press the button, arrow 4. the stored speed is resumed and maintained.

In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:

> When driving stability control systems are intervening

> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi- tion

> With automatic transmission/SMG: when you engage selector lever position N

> When the ignition is switched off

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Stored speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 80.<

Malfunction The warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You

can find more information starting on page 79.

Active cruise control*

The concept With active cruise control, you can select a desired speed which is not only automatically maintained when driving on open roadways, but also varied to maintain a selected distance set- ting as slower traffic is encountered.

Active cruise control is a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on high- ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe- cially on longer trips, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.

Within the limits of its capability, the system automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify the distance to be maintained from the vehicle in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the distance is speed-dependent. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automat- ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig- nal a following driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on the kind of trans- mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main- tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead

C o

n tr

o ls

63

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected by increasing the throttle setting and shifting gears automatically or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed will be held when driving downhill, too.

Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con- ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Pay special attention to the System limitations section beginning on page 66.

Braking sensation The system's automatic brake operation results in a braking sensation that is slightly different from what you feel when you brake the vehicle yourself in a similar situation. Possible noises during automatic deceleration are normal.

Manual transmission/SMG You can shift gears while cruise control is acti- vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.

In Drive mode, the SMG acts similarly to an automatic transmission in position D.

Range of applications The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or 30 km/h, and the maximum desired speed is 110 mph or 180 km/h.

As with conventional cruise control sys- tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the drivers own personal responsibility, alertness and aware- ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off-

ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering inter- changes, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving conditions could result which violate the law or pose a risk of accident.<

One lever for all functions

1 Store and increase desired speed

2 Store and decrease desired speed

3 Deactivate system, refer to page 65

4 Resume stored desired speed and dis- tance, refer to page 65

5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead, refer to page 64

Maintaining current speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1,or briefly pull it, arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.

D ri

vi n

g

64

The car's current speed is stored and main- tained. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys- tem will brake the vehicle slightly.

Adjusting desired speed Adjust your desired speed to the traffic conditions and remain ready to brake at

all times, otherwise there is a risk of accident. Great differences in speed to the vehicle ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck or when another vehicle swerves into your lane, cannot be compensated for by the system.<

Increasing in increments Repeatedly tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of 110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.

The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.

Increasing continuously Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The speed then displayed is stored and reached as soon as the road ahead of you is clear.

Decreasing in increments Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is reached.

> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.

The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.

Selecting distance

> Press downward: Increase distance

> Press upward: Decrease distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Distance 1

Distance 2

C o

n tr

o ls

65

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Use good judgement to select the appro- priate following distance given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec- ommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, you may be in violation of the law or an accident could result.<

Deactivating cruise control

Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When the speed is reduced to below 20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation

> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission

> When you select the automatic transmis- sion's/SMG's neutral position N

> When you activate the Dynamic Traction Control DTC

> When you deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

> When the system does not recognize any objects for a longer period of time, e.g. on

infrequently traveled roads without a shoul- der or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 66

> When you apply the handbrake

When the system is deactivated, you must brake the vehicle yourself and/or

maneuver as necessary, otherwise there is a risk of accident.<

Warning lamp The warning lamp comes on when active cruise control has been auto- matically deactivated due to a driving

speed below 20 mph or 30 km/h, an application of the handbrake or a DSC intervention. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display.

Resuming stored desired speed and distance Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed and distance are regained and maintained.

In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:

> When driving stability control systems are intervening

> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi- tion

> With automatic transmission/SMG: when you engage selector lever position N

> When the ignition is switched off

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed

2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead

Distance 3 This distance is always set when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.

Distance 4

D ri

vi n

g

66

Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis- tance; driver must brake the vehicle

Flashes in yellow: driving stability control systems are intervening; cruise control is deactivated

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the sys- tem is activated.

4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis- played

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 80.<

Warning lamps The indicator 2 flashes in red; a signal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Active cruise con-

trol cannot automatically restore the distance to the vehicle ahead. This indicator does not release you from your responsibility to adapt your desired speed and driving style to prevailing driving conditions.

The indicator 2 flashes in yellow. The prerequisites for operating active cruise control are not met, e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC

interventions. Active cruise control is deacti- vated. You can reactivate the system, if desired, by tapping or pulling the lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It is not possible to resume a stored speed.

Radar sensor

The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt, snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure to use particular care when removing any layers of snow or ice from the sensor.

When the radar sensor is not properly posi- tioned, active cruise control cannot be activated at all.

Malfunction The warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You

can find more information starting on page 79.

System limitations

Always remember that the range and abil- ity of the system does have physical limi-

tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate

your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi- cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a

C o

n tr

o ls

67

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback. It is also possible that the system may not detect smaller moving objects such as motor- cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the sys- tem will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alert- ness.<

Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning

system.<

If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi- cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected. Be aware that changing to a clear, unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle accelerating.

Be certain to deactivate the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-

ramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.

While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys- tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. Therefore, the system cannot decrease your speed for large differences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when

a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<

Active cruise control can only decelerate the vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane into your lane, active cruise control will not rec- ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane ahead of your vehicle.

When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of collision. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi- cle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<

Behavior in curves

Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val- leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec- ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to

D ri

vi n

g

68

the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceler- ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Your responsibility Your actions have priority at all times. When you press the accelerator pedal while driving with active cruise control, the automatic braking function will be temporarily interrupted. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the desired speed or the selected distance to the vehicle ahead is achieved again.

Do not leave your foot on the accelerator pedal and make sure that no objects such

as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal. Otherwise the system may not be able to brake the vehicle.<

C o

n tr

o ls

69

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Everything under control

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Resetting trip odometer

2 Outside temperature display and clock

3 Odometer and trip odometer

Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to page 73.

Outside temperature display, clock Setting the time, refer to page 77.

Outside temperature warning When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should there-

fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, outside tem- perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been removed from the igni- tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi- tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis- play.

Check coolant level, refer to page 201.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

70

Energy Control

Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini- mum exhaust emissions.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 15.9 US gallons/ 60 liters. You can find information on refueling on page 186.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/ 50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis- play.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

To call up the information, press the button in the turn indicator stalk.

The following items of information are dis- played in the order listed:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 73.

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

Be sure to refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, refer to page 71, you can have the average speed for another trip dis- played.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn indicator stalk for approx. 2 seconds.

C o

n tr

o ls

71

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

With the trip computer, refer to page 71, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator stalk for approx. 2 seconds.

Displays on the Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive; concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Car Data" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- troller.

> Estimated time of arrival at destination:

> Manually enter a distance in the com- puter, refer to information further below

> Enter a destination in the navigation sys- tem, refer to page 125

> Cruising range

> Distance to destination:

> Manually enter a distance in the com- puter, refer to information further below

> Enter a destination in the navigation sys- tem, refer to page 125

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Resetting values You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Entering a distance manually 1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically entered during destination guidance.

Trip computer The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday trip.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

72

1. Open the start menu.

2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- troller.

> Departure time

> Driving time

> Distance traveled

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all values to zero:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

Display options You can display the computer or the trip com- puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select a menu item:

> "Onboard info"

> "Trip computer"

3. Press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

73

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Settings and information

Operating principle

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set val- ues

> Calling up computer information 70

3 When the lights are switched on: instrument lighting brightness 96

4 Calling up Check Control 79

5 Checking oil level 199

6 Setting the time 77

7 Setting the date 78

8 Viewing service requirement display 74

Exiting displays The outside-temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measure You can set units of measure. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 29.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

74

4. Select "Units" and press the controller.

5. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

6. Select the desired measurement unit and press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by

your BMW Service Advisor.<

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator stalk up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE- INFO".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

C o

n tr

o ls

75

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting functions

2 Service requirements

3 Engine oil

4 Exhaust emissions test* 5 Roadworthiness test*

6 Microfilter

7 Spark plugs

8 Brakes, front

9 Brakes, rear

10 Brake fluid

Supplementary information You can have further information on the scope of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis- play, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con-

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

76

troller until "Status" is selected and press the controller.

A list of selected maintenance operations and, if applicable, inspections required by law is dis- played.

You can request more detailed information on every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please

schedule a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering dates of statutory emissions tests and vehicle inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 78, otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser- vice is not ensured.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press the controller.

5. Select "Status" and press the controller.

6. Select "Emission inspect." or "State inspection" and press the controller.

7. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.

8. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

9. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

10. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

11. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Select and press the controller.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 203.

C o

n tr

o ls

77

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Clock The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 29.

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the time format below.

1. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator stalk up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

6. Press button 2. The system displays the new time.

7. Use button 2 to save the new time.

Via iDrive iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the controller forwards once to move the highlight marker to the uppermost field.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

78

5. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.

Adjusting settings 7. Turn the controller to set the hours and

press the controller.

8. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

The system accepts the new time.

Switching on the hour signal* You will hear three tones just before each full hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.

Setting the time format 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Time" and press the controller.

5. Select "Time format" and press the control- ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the controller.

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 29.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

1. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator stalk up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

4. Press button 2.

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

6. Press button 2. The system displays the new date.

7. Use button 2 to save the new date.

Via iDrive iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

79

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Select "Date" and press the controller.

5. Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first date display setting is selected.

6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

8. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Date" and press the controller.

5. Select "Date format" and press the control- ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the controller.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys- tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes- sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circum- stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes- sages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in both the indicator area 1 and the display 2 in various combinations and colors.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to page 80.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown immediately as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

To exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

80

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button in the turn indicator stalk.

Some Check Control messages remain visible until the malfunction in question has been recti- fied. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc- tions occur at the same time, the Check Control messages are displayed in succession.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other Check Control messages are automati- cally hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you.

Viewing stored Check Control messages

1. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator stalk up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK CON- TROL".

2. Press button 2. "CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

3. Lightly push button 1 to check for other messages.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.

Viewing more information later iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller

C o

n tr

o ls

81

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select a text message and press the con- troller.

To exit the display: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Speed limit You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

5. Select the speed value and press the con- troller.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The limit is automatically switched on.

Applying your current speed as limit Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating the limit Select "On" and press the controller.

Limit is activated.

Stopwatch iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- ler.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

82

Starting, stopping or resetting > Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand.

> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.

Taking an interim time reading Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.

All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch

is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.<

Altering settings

Language on the Control Display The language on the Control Display can be set, refer to the concept on page 16. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Text language" and press the con- troller. You can switch to another language

for the display texts and navigation mes- sages.

6. Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.

Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Brightness" and press the control- ler.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

C o

n tr

o ls

83

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Technology for driving comfort and safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicatorwarn you of the presence of an object in front of* or behind your car. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from the front sensors* or both rear corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sen- sors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth- erwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<

Automatic mode With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated automatically after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selec- tor lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Switching on manually

Press the button, the LED lights up.

Switching off manually Press the button again; the LED goes out.

The system is automatically deactivated once the vehicle travels approx. 165 ft/50 m or exceeds a speed of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h; the LED goes out. You can reactivate the sys- tem as needed.

Signal tones When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. For exam- ple, the tone sounds at the rear if the system detects an object behind the car. As the dis- tance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin- uous tone sounds.

The warning signal is canceled after approx. 3 seconds, if you are moving parallel to a wall.

Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc- tioning. A message appears on the

Control Display. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.

Manual mode The LED above the button flashes in addition.

PDC with optical warning You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis- play even before the acoustic signal sounds.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

84

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "PDC" is selected and press the con- troller.

5. Select "PDC display on" and press the con- troller.

6. The PDC screen is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limitations Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also sub- ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and couplings, thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects already indicated, such as a curb, may enter the sensors' dead areas before a continu- ous audible signal is given. Higher, protruding objects, such as ledges, may not be detectable. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<

Driving stability control systems Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 117.

Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

DBC Dynamic Brake Control When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the brake application. If the brake is released, DBC will be switched off.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel- erate. DSC also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks.<

C o

n tr

o ls

85

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Deactivating DSC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi- cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button again; the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

To control If the indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

If the indicator lamps are on: DSC has been completely deacti- vated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

Briefly press the button; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster come on.

To control If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

If the indicator lamps are on: DTC has been activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

xDrive 325xi, 330xi xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system. The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and road conditions.

Malfunction In case of any of the malfunctions described below, drive cautiously and

think well ahead. Avoid driving on rough tracks and pressing the accelerator pedal down to full throttle or kick-down position, otherwise the drive system could be damaged or accidents could result.<

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

86

The warning lamps come on. xDrive has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

The warning lamps come on. xDrive and DSC have failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Hill Descent Control HDC 325xi, 330xi HDC is a downhill driving assistant that reduces your speed on steep downhill gradients and makes it even easier to control your BMW's handling under these conditions. The vehicle then moves slightly faster than double walking speed without the driver needing to intervene.

HDC can be activated as long as you are driving under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically reduced to slightly more than double walking speed and maintained.

Increasing or decreasing speed By accelerating or braking you can change the speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph, approx. 5 to 25 km/h. You can specify a target speed within the same range using the cruise control stalk.

1 To increase speed

2 To decrease speed

Activating HDC

Press the button; the indicator lamp lights up. The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle is being braked automatically.

Deactivating HDC Press the button again; the indicator lamp goes out.

HDC is deactivated instantly above a speed of approx. 35 mph or 60 km/h, or approx. 10 seconds after the ignition is switched off.

Using HDC In cars with manual transmission: Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.

With automatic transmission: You can use HDC in any drive position.

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Display for target speed

2 HDC display

Malfunction The HDC display disappears during HDC oper- ation, or does not appear: HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces- sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

C o

n tr

o ls

87

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Malfunction in driving stability control systems

The warning lamps come on. DSC including DTC and DBC is malfunc- tioning. The vehicle remains operational.

Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Drive cautiously and think well ahead, otherwise unstable driving conditions

could result.<

323i*, 325i, 330i The warning lamps for the brake sys- tem come on in red, together with the yellow indicator lamps for driving sta- bility control systems and FTM: The driving stability control systems and the Flat Tire Monitor have failed.

All warning lamps come on in yellow: The driving stability control systems and the Flat Tire Monitor have failed. The electronic brake-force distribution is still active.

Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Drive cautiously, think well ahead and avoid full brake applications, otherwise

accidents could result.<

Display* of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

Display* of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

With xDrive 325xi, 330xi If one of the malfunctions described below occurs, drive cautiously and think

well ahead. Also avoid situations that require full braking, otherwise accidents could result. Avoid driving on rough tracks and pressing the accelerator pedal down to full throttle or kick- down position, otherwise the drive system could be damaged.<

The warning lamps for the brake sys- tem come on in red, together with the yellow indicator lamps for driving sta- bility control systems and FTM: The driving stability control systems and the Flat Tire Monitor have failed.

All warning lamps come on in yellow: The driving stability control systems and the Flat Tire Monitor have failed. The electronic brake-force distribution is still active.

Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display* of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

Display* of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

Drive-off assistant The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the handbrake for this.

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.

2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the

brake is released. Depending on vehicle load, the car may roll backwards a little during this time span. Drive off without delay after releas- ing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll back- wards.<

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

88

Malfunction The warning lamps for the brake sys- tem light up in yellow. The drive-off assistant has failed. The car will not be held in place after the brake is

released. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display these warn- ing lamps.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept The Flat Tire Monitor monitors tire pressures while the car is being driven. The system reports any significant loss of pressure in one tire in relation to another.

If a tire loses pressure, its rolling radius changes, and this in turn alters the speed of rotation. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.

The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-

rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<

System limitations The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage

caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.<

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> If snow chains are attached

Initializing the system The initialization is completed during driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically. Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.<

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the con- troller.

5. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

6. Select "Set tire pressure" and press the controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

8. Start to drive. "Status: FTM active" reappears in the Con-

C o

n tr

o ls

89

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

trol Display. Initialization is then completed while the car is in motion.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat

tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.

If the car is not equipped with Run- Flat Tires, refer to page 196, the stan-

dard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.

If all four tires are inflated to the cor- rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor

might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:

> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With a medium load: 2 persons, luggage compartment full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 90 miles/150 km

> With a full load: 4 or more persons, luggage compart- ment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h. In the event

of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during

the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over to the side of the road at the earliest opportunity. Otherwise, parts of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving. Contact your BMW Cen- ter.<

Malfunction The warning lamps come on in yel- low. A message appears on the Con- trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed. Have the

system checked as soon as possible.

Active steering*

The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move- ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low road-speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer- ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct, and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 85.

Malfunction The warning lamps come on. Active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at

higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi- tively to steering wheel movements. Drive cau-

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

90

tiously and think well ahead. Have the system checked.

If the warning lamp lights up during the first engine starting following a power supply inter- ruption, the system must be activated by being initialized.

Brake Force Display*

The brake lamps light up in two stages, depending on how sharply you apply the brakes.

> Normal braking: The brake lamps and the center brake lamp light up.

> Sharp braking: The illuminated surface of the brake lamps is enlarged, as long as the rear fog light is not switched on.

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Head airbags

3 Side airbags

Protective action Observe the adjustment instructions on page 40 to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal

impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags will purposely not be activated by every collision, e.g. not by more minor acci- dents, certain roll-over situations and rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attach

C o

n tr

o ls

91

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe- cifically approved for seats with integral side air- bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the back- rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod- ify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol- stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components imme- diately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW Cen- ter or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emer- gency or undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warning notices and information about the air- bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags An analysis of the impression in the front pas- senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air- bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status

of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger air- bags below.

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau-

tions and handling instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 49. The front and side airbags can also be deacti- vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer- tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front

passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the rele- vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Other- wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<

Status of front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accor- dance with whether and how the front passen- ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are acti- vated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp comes on as intended when a child in a specially designated child- restraint system is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.

> The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.

T ec

h n

o lo

g y

fo r d

ri vi

n g

c o

m fo

rt a

n d

s af

et y

92

Operational readiness of airbag system

As of radio readiness, refer to page 52, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not come on along with

radio readiness

> Warning lamp remains permanently on

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci- dent occurs.<

C o

n tr

o ls

93

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lamps off and daytime driving lamps

1 Parking lamps and daytime driving lamps

2 Low beams

3 Automatic headlamp control* and Adaptive Head Light*

Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking. For the additional option of roadside parking lamps on one side of the car only, refer to page 95.

The parking lamps will discharge the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

If desired, the light switch can remain in the low- beam headlamp position. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked.

If necessary, switch on the parking lamps as described in the section about parking lamps.

Automatic headlamp control* When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend-

ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on.

When driving into tunnels with bright overhead lights, there may be a delay before the head- lamps come on. The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps*. When the daytime driving lamps are activated, refer to page 94, the low-beam headlamps are always switched on when the switch is in posi- tion 3 and the ignition is on.<

If desired, the light switch can remain in position 3. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.<

Adjusting sensitivity You can program how sensitively the system reacts to ambient light.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

L am

p s

94

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Auto. headlamps" and press the controller.

6. Select a menu item:

> "Sensitive"

> "Normal"

> "Slower"

7. Press the controller.

Pathway lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after park- ing the car, with the lights switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

You can adjust the operating period or deacti- vate the function.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

5. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to select the corre- sponding duration.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting.

Daytime driving lamps If desired, the light switch can remain in the Lamps off position or the Parking lamps posi- tion. In the Lamps off position, the exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked. In the Parking lamps position, the park- ing lamps come on after the ignition is switched off.

If necessary, switch on the parking lamps as described in the section about parking lamps.

Activating/deactivating daytime driving lamps* 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

95

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Select "Daytime running light" and press the controller.

The daytime driving lamps are switched on.

Adaptive Head Light*

The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition on, turn the light switch to the automatic headlamp control position, refer to page 93.

To avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehi- cles, Adaptive Head Light is not active when the car is driven in reverse, and directs the light to the front passenger's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Malfunction The LED next to the symbol for automatic head- lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps*

Roadside parking lamps, left or right* There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked, if permitted in the country of use.

After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Fog lamps*

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

L am

p s

96

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver- sion, the fog lamps are switched off when you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams*.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

1. Lightly push button 1 up or down repeat- edly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Lightly push button 1 up or down to select the brightness; the setting is stored imme- diately.

4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator stalk. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.

Interior lamps The interior lamps, the footwell lamps*, the lug- gage compartment lamp and the courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lampsare set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about

15 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 52.<

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Interior lamps, front and rear*: To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the lamp permanently, press the button for the front interior lamp for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.

C o

n tr

o ls

97

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 100

3 Air to the footwell

4 Air distribution, manual

5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of passenger compartment

6 Maximum cooling

7 AUTO program

8 Air flow rate, manual

9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/ Recirculated-air mode

10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side of passenger compartment

11 Residual heat

12 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation

13 Switching cooling function on/off manually

14 Rear window defroster

15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed

The current setting for the air distribution is dis- played on the Control Display, refer to page 98.

C lim

at e

98

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort- able for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 29.

Switching manual air distribution on/ off

The emerging air is directed to the windows, to the upper body area or to the footwell.

You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO but- ton.

Fine adjustments to manual air distribution You can set the rate of incoming airflow for manual air distribution.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller.

4. Select the desired field.

5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution individually.

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area

3 Air to the footwell

Temperature Set the desired temperatures indi- vidually for the driver's and front passenger's sides.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi- ble regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

When you switch between different tem- perature settings in quick succession, the

automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.<

Maximum cooling At outside temperatures above 327/06 and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.

The automatic climate control switches to the lowest temperature and operates in recircu- lated-air mode. Air flows at maximum rate only from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cool- ing.

AUTO program The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and

C o

n tr

o ls

99

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

side windows, towards the upper body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window condensation.

The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO program You can set the intensity of the air supply in the AUTO program. This changes the duration of time during which the vehicle interior is heated or cooled.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Call up "Climate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired field.

5. Press the controller to set the desired inten- sity.

The selected intensity level of the auto- matic program is switched on.

Adjusting air flow rate manually Press the left side of the button to reduce airflow. Press the right side of the button to increase it.

You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.

Switching the system on/off With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the auto- matic climate control. All indicators go out.

Press any button except REST to reactivate the automatic climate control.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/Recirculated-air mode

Switch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly:

> LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec- essary, the system blocks the supply of out- side air and recirculates the inside air. As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently, the system automatically switches back to outside air supply.

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation

in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, otherwise the air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin- uously.<

Via the button* on the steering wheel You can switch between operating modes via an individually programmable buttonon the steering wheel, refer to page 11:

> When outside air is coming in, you can use the button on the steering wheel to switch between outside air and recirculated-air mode.

> When recirculated-air mode or AUC mode is switched on, you can use the button on the steering wheel to switch between recir- culated-air mode and AUC mode.

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com- partment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.

C lim

at e

100

The function can be switched on when the fol- lowing conditions are met:

> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off

> While the engine is at operating tempera- ture

> As long as battery voltage is sufficient

> At an outside temperature below 777/ 256

The LED is lit when the function is on.

As of radio readiness, you can set the interior temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri- bution.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly removes ice and conden- sation from the windshield and front side windows.

Switching cooling function on/off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before also reheating it as

required, according to the temperature setting. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program. The passen- ger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Rear window defroster The defroster switches off auto- matically after a certain time.

Ventilation

1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from the vents for the upper body area

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.

Ventilation in the rear

1 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper- ature:

> Turn toward blue: colder

> Turn toward red: warmer

3 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

C o

n tr

o ls

101

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro- vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW Cen- ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance. You can call up further information in the service requirements display, refer to page 74.

Parked car ventilation

Concept The parked car ventilation/heating provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.

The parked car ventilation/heating remains switched on for 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The sys- tem can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driv- ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.

The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.

Switching on/off directly iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.

The parked car ventilation/heating is switched on.

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on times iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con- troller.

5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

C lim

at e

102

6. Select the time and press the controller. The first time setting is selected.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.

Activating switch-on times Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con- troller.

The switch-on time is activated. The symbol on the automatic climate control

display lights up.

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system only switches on within the next 24 hours. After these have

elapsed, it must be reactivated.<

C o

n tr

o ls

103

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled devices, such as door openers and house alarm sys- tems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans- mission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 104.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Com- ply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your BMW Center or call: 1-800-355-3515. You can also obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 52.

2. When starting operation for the first time: Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. all stored programs are cleared.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 2 to 8 in/5 to 20 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec- onds, alter the distance.

5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

104

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the system when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on.

If the system fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short while and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternat- ing-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters

that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any questions, please contact your BMW Center.<

Deleting stored programs Press both outer memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes: all stored programs are cleared.

It is not possible to clear individual programs.

Interior rearview mirror with digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary direction in which you are driving.

Setting compass zones Depending on the vehicle's geographic loca- tion, the relevant compass zone must be set.

C o

n tr

o ls

105

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Refer to the world map with compass zones below.

To set a compass zone, press the adjustment button on the bottom of the interior rearview mirror with a pointed object, such as a pen, for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the com- pass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, press the adjust- ment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone in which you are currently driving:

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> C or CAL is displayed.

> The compass shows the wrong cardinal direction.

> The cardinal direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.

> Not all cardinal directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.

3. Press the adjustment button to call up C or CAL. Then drive in one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the C or CAL dis- play is replaced by the cardinal directions.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

106

Roller sun blinds*

Rear window blind

Tap the button in the center console to raise or lower the roller sun blind.

Roller sun blinds for rear side windows Pull loop of roller sun blind and hook onto bracket.

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on.

Closing Fold the cover up.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Locking To lock the glove compartment, use the inte- grated key of the remote control or the spare key, refer to page 28.

Rechargeable flashlight* It is on the left-hand side of the glove compart- ment. The flashlight can remain plugged in. Whenever required, pull the flashlight out of its socket.

Only insert the flashlight back into the socket when it is switched off, otherwise

there is a risk of damage.<

Center armrest

Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*, depending on the equip- ment version.

Opening Press the button, see arrow. The lid opens.

C o

n tr

o ls

107

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Ventilated storage compartment

The storage compartment in the center armrest can be ventilated: slide the switch backwards.

The temperature is controlled via the knurled wheel for adjusting the temperature of air venti- lating the rear of the passenger compartment, refer to page 100.

Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, refer to page 162.

Storage compartments inside the vehicle Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find compartments beside the steering col- umn*, in the front doors and in the center con- sole*. There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.

Clothes hooks There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in the rear passenger compartment.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do

not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other- wise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv- ing.<

Cup holders Do not place glassware in a cup holder; otherwise there is an increased risk of

injury in the event of an accident.<

Front

Opening Briefly press the center of the cover.

Closing Briefly press the cover in the center and push in the cup holder.

Rear There are two additional cup holders in the rear center armrest.

Ashtray, front

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

108

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and possibly burn them- selves.<

Ashtray, rear

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying Lift out the insert.

Connecting electrical appliances In your BMW, you can use electrical devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid dam- aging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket* Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket, refer to page 108.

Socket in the center armrest External audio device, refer to page 107.

Sockets in the rear center console*

Remove corresponding cover.

C o

n tr

o ls

109

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Socket in the luggage compartment*

Open the cap.

Through-loading system*

Opening 1. Open the belt lock of the rear center safety

belt. To do so, press the button, see arrow, and release the latch plate.

2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt into the specially designated fixture on the rear window shelf.

3. Push the corresponding head restraint down as far as it will go, refer to page 43.

4. To release the rear seat back, pull the corre- sponding lever in the luggage compart- ment.

5. The unlocked rear seat back moves forward slightly. Fold the seat back forward by the head restraint.

Closing 1. Return the rear seat back to its upright posi-

tion and engage it.

When returning the backrest into its seating position, make sure that the

seat's locking mechanism engages prop- erly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.<

2. Release the latch plate from the fixture on the rear window shelf and insert it into the belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

110

The lashing eyes in the luggage compartment provide you with a way to attach luggage com- partment nets* or draw straps for securing suit- cases and luggage, refer to page 119.

Storage spaces in the luggage compartment Left storage compartment, suitable e.g. for storing a box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD cases, depending on vehicle equipment ver- sion.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following additional storage spaces can be found in the luggage compartment:

> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel

> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags or tote bags

> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella

> Net for small objects on the right trim panel

> Retaining straps next to the rear lashing eyes, e.g. for securing an umbrella

> Folding, removable box* under the floor panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items

> Insertable dividers* and removable storage tray for the storage compartment under the floor panel

> Drawer for storing small items. Pull the han- dle firmly to release the drawer. If neces- sary, you can pull out the drawer entirely, refer to the information below

Do not drive or close the luggage com- partment lid while the drawer is pulled

out. On uphill gradients, release the drawer with caution, otherwise it could slide out on its own and cause injury. Do not exceed a maximum load of 11 lbs/5 kg for the drawer, otherwise damage could result.<

Removing the drawer 1. Push the drawer all the way in.

2. Turn the catches on the left and right all the way out.

3. Remove the drawer by pulling it down and backwards.

Reinserting the drawer 1. Hook the guides of the drawer into the front

of the yellow guide aids on the underside of the luggage compartment.

2. Insert the catches into the mounts on the underside of the luggage compartment.

3. Turn the catches on the left and right all the way in.

Folding up the luggage compartment floor panel Press the floor panel against the top of the lug- gage compartment; a locking device holds the luggage compartment floor panel in place. To detach the floor panel, pull it out of the locking device.

Equipment version with drawer:

C o

n tr

o ls

111

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Take the retaining strap on the right-hand side of the drawer out of the bracket and use it to fix the cargo luggage compartment panel in place.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-

partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam- age could result.<

Lashing eyes You will find lashing eyes in the luggage com- partment for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, refer to page 119.

Ski bag* Designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/ 2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

Loading 1. Fold down the center armrest.

2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover.

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag's retain- ing strap in the center belt buckle.

Make sure to load only clean skis into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

112

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW Cen-

ter.<

C o

n tr

o ls

113

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Driving tips This section provides you with information

useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

116

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Attempt to vary both engine and vehicle speeds, but refrain from exceeding an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a driving speed of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode.

After 1,200 miles/2,000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Sequential manual gearbox SMG Do not use the acceleration assistant during the break-in period, page 57.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx.

300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Close the luggage compartment lid Operate the vehicle only when the lug- gage compartment lid is closed. Other-

wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle.<

If special circumstances make it absolutely nec- essary to drive with the luggage compartment lid open:

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

2. Increase the air flow rate of the automatic climate control considerably, refer to page 99.

Hot exhaust system In all vehicles, extremely high tempera- tures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys- tem, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while park- ing, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage.<

Mobile phone in the vehicle BMW discourages the use of mobile communications devices, e.g. mobile

phones, inside the vehicle without a direct con-

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

117

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication device can influence one another. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmission will be dissipated from the vehicle interior.<

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin- ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini- mum tread depth on page 195.

Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the

vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Use the handbrake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with the clutch; use the handbrake. Otherwise

greater clutch wear will result.<

Sequential manual gearbox SMG On uphill slopes, drive off without delay. Do not hold the vehicle in place by

depressing the accelerator pedal; apply the handbrake instead. Otherwise, the transmis- sion could overheat.<

Also use the drive-off assistant, refer to page 87.

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

118

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces- sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Down- shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans- mission, refer to page 58.

Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in idle or with the

engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise pedal function could be impaired.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic cli- mate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Before driving into a car wash For general information about taking care of your BMW, refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

With convenient access and automatic transmission Insert the remote control into the ignition switch.

The engine can be switched off when the selec- tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 36.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

119

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug- gage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

> Position heavy objects as low and as far for- ward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backs.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo

> Smaller and relatively light items can be retained with tensioning straps or draw straps*.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW Center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two are locatedon the inside rear wall of the luggage compartment 1, and two others are on the side walls of the luggage com- partment 2. Comply with the information provided with the cargo straps.

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerves are necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 220, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu- pants.<

Roof-mounted luggage rack* A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the precautions included with the installation instructions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

120

Mounting points

Open the covers.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the specified weights on page 220.

The roof load must be uniformly distributed and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for rais- ing the glass sunroof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid.

Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

121

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

S ta

rt in

g th

e n

av ig

at io

n sy

st em

124

Starting the navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi- gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at your BMW Center.

Inserting navigation DVD

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up.

2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con- tents of the DVD to be read in.

Removing navigation DVD 1. Press button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos- sible that it is blocked. A message appears on the Control Display.

Display in the assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica- tion.

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the assistance window.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route view or "Current position".

4. Press the controller.

The contents of the assistance window are con- tinually updated as you drive.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

125

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering a destination by voice com- mands*, refer to page 128

> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 130

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 131

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 132

> Selecting home address, refer to page 134

After selecting your destination you can pro- ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 136.

Operating navigation system Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. If you do not observe this precau- tion, you may be in violation of the law, and can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

Entering a destination manually The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 135. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

126

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of country and local- ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Selecting country 1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-

played and press the controller. The list of available countries appears on the display.

2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.

At least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the des- tination guidance.

Entering destination by town/city name 1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-

played and press the controller.

2. Select the starting letter and press the con- troller.

A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.

3. To delete letters, if necessary:

> To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller.

> To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and hold the controller down.

4. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

> To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the control-

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

127

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

ler until the city or town name is selected from the list and press the controller.

Entering destination by zip code 1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Enter the zip code: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.

> To enter spaces: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

> To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller.

> To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and hold the controller down.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding destination is displayed.

4. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the con- troller.

Entering street, house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street. The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city.

The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering a town/city You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the designated country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

128

1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field.

The arrow is highlighted.

2. Move the controller to the right until you see a request to enter a street in the country and press the controller.

3. Switch to the second field from the top and enter the street.

Entering a house number 1. Select "House number" and press the con-

troller.

2. To enter the house number: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.

3. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.

Only house numbers stored for the street on the navigation DVD can be entered.

Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry

Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler. Destination guidance starts immediately.

If you do not want to start destination guidance right away: Select "Add to destination list" and press the controller. The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 131.

Entering a destination by voice commands* With the Professional navigation system, you can enter a desired destination via the voice command system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice command system if necessary.

You can have the possible commands read aloud via {Options}.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.

2. {Enter address}

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

129

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Selecting country

Say the destination country in the language of the voice command system.

Entering destination To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 destina- tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.

Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.

To enter the house number:

House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Storing destinations Destinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.

Map-guided destination selection If you only know the location of the town or street of the destination, then you can enter the destination by using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to limit the destination on the map and then adopt it for destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

Say the destination country.

1. To spell the name of a town/city: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recog- nize the town/city.

The system suggests a location.

2. Selecting location: {Yes} or select another location: {No} Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3} The following options are available: {Next page}: further list entries are shown. {Repeat}: the town/city can be respelled.

Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination list} or {Add to address book}

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

130

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

A section of a map is displayed on the Con- trol Display:

> During destination guidance, around the current destination

> With the destination guidance deacti- vated, around the last destination entered

4. Turn the controller to adjust the scale. To move the map, move the controller in the desired direction. The controller can be moved to the left, right, forwards, backwards and also diago- nally.

5. Press the controller to adopt it for destina- tion guidance or to store it. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.

> "Show current position" places your current position at the center of the map.

> "Show destination position" places the current destination at the center of the map.

> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".

> Exit the menu.

7. Press the controller.

The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using information You can obtain a display of selected destina- tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt them for destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

131

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Select "Information" and press the control- ler.

4. Selecting location:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "On a new destination"

5. Press the controller.

6. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res- taurants", and press the controller. Destinations appear on the Control Display, which are sorted alphabetically or accord- ing to distance.

7. Select a destination and press the control- ler.

8. Select a menu item:

> To transfer the address to the destina- tion list and start destination guidance:

Select "Select as destination" and press the controller.

> To establish a telephone connection: Select "Call" and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list The last 20 destinations entered into the sys- tem are shown in the destination list. You can call up these destinations and adopt them for destination guidance. If you are planning a longer journey, for exam- ple, you can store all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destination list in advance, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 125.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list.

This symbol indicates the current destina- tion.

To show other destinations in the destination list: Turn the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

132

Adopting destination for destination guidance 1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

Editing the destination list 1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

> To store the entry: Select "Add to address book".

> To display information on the destina- tion: Select "Information on destination".

> To delete the entry: Select "Delete entry".

> To delete all entries: Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.

> To change the entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination by town/city name, page 126.

3. Press the controller.

Address book

Opening address book iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con- troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

4. Enter name and address.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller. The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the desti- nation list in the address book, refer to page 131.

Storing current position* The current position can be adopted into the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

133

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

address" is selected and press the control- ler.

3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper- ation, refer to Entering a destination manu- ally, page 125.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the area covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller. The stored entries appear on the Control Display.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

To start destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler.

Changing destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller.

4. Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destina- tion manually, page 125.

Deleting individual destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

134

3. Select "Delete address" and press the con- troller.

Deleting all destinations from address book 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Vehicle settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Delete data" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.

6. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Storing home address You can store your current position or the cur- rent destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until

"Home address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address" or "Save current destination" during the desti- nation guidance, and press the controller.

In order to accept the home address as the des- tination:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

To change the entry:

1. Select "Home address" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 125.

Route selection You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during des- tination entry or during destination guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navi- gation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

135

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Changing route criteria 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control Display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

> "With highways" Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority.

> "Avoid highways" Highways are avoided as far as possible.

> "Fast route" The fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fast- est roads

> "Short route" Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be

4. Press the controller.

The route criterion is highlighted.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri- terion and then press the controller:

> "Avoid tollroads" Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.

> "Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided as far as possible.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

With the Professional navigation system, the route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display:

Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller.

Word-matching principle The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns. The system runs ongoing checks, com- paring your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:

> Names of specific locations can also vary from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another coun- try.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "Mnchen" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identifica- tion.

> The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD. The system will not accept non-existent names and addresses.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

136

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.

2. Select the destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 125.

3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive. You will be notified in time of any necessary change of direction by means of spoken

instructions and the display of the direction arrow.

Terminating/continuing destination guidance

In the arrow or map display Select the symbol and press the controller.

In the destination list This symbol indicates the current destina-

tion.

1. Select the current destination and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

137

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

If you did not reach your destination before the end of your last journey, the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next journey: "Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.

To start destination guidance immediately: Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Route display You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance.

From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer

to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<

Displaying arrow view 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until

"Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is shown.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Selecting route criteria

3 Starting/stopping destination guidance

4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

5 Distance to the next change of direction

6 Current location

7 Direction of travel

> Outline of an arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route

> Solid arrow: Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal- culated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.

The arrows change appearance before a change of direction.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

138

1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance to change of direction

3 Change of direction

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying maps You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map view is selected:

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

3. Press the controller.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Starting/stopping destination guidance

3 Map-guided destination selection

4 Showing/hiding information last selected, refer to Selecting destination using infor- mation on page 130

5 Changing map view

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6 Changing route criteria

7 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

At scales of less than 300 miles/500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north, toward your current direction of travel, or show the map in perspective. At scales of 300 miles/500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.

Changing map view

Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller. The next map view is displayed.

To change scale Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

139

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Displaying towns/cities and streets along the route You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance.

The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the con- troller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on/off at any time:

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Display settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Navigation voice instructions on" and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.

Repeat voice instructions and cancel With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel, you can also execute the following func- tions, refer to page 47:

> Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.

> Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period.

Adjusting volume of voice instructions The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

140

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- sary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Bypassing route sections During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the route: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur- rent position" is selected and press the controller.

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis- played on a map, refer to page 138.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

141

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

What to do if

What to do if

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc- tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con- trol Display? The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This infor- mation is indicated on the DVD label.

> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- play? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position owing to obstructions, your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your current position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed when you are in the open.

> the destination guidance does not accept a destination? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a destination as close as possible to the orig- inal one.

> the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name? On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guid- ance.

> you want to enter a destination for the des- tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let- ters to choose from. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec- tions? You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga-

tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.

> the navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.

Entertainment Operation of the radio and CD equipment as

well as their tone settings are described in this chapter.

O n

/o ff

a n

d s

et ti

n g

s

144

On/off and settings

The following audio sources have shared con- trols and setting options:

> Radio

> CD player

> CD changer*

Controls The audio sources can be operated using:

> Buttons near the CD player

> iDrive

> Buttonson the steering wheel, refer to page 11

Buttons near the CD player

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol- ume

> Press: switch on/off. When you switch on, the last set radio station or CD track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

2 Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Select track for CD player and CD changer.

5 Drive for navigation DVD

Operation via iDrive iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

You have the following choices:

> "FM" and "AM": radio reception

> "WB": Weather Band station

> "SAT": satellite radio

> "CD": CD player or changer

> "Audio Aux": external audio device

> "Set": depending on the audio source, other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sam- ple stations.

From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer

to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<

The selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off In order to switch the entertainment sound out- put on and off: Press button 1 on the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi- cates that sound output is switched off.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

145

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing tone settings 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected if you have called up "Entertainment" in the start menu: Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the controller.

Treble and bass 1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-

troller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

Balance and fader You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control The speed-dependent volume control auto- matically increases the volume with increasing driving speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.

O n

/o ff

a n

d s

et ti

n g

s

146

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- troller.

2. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System* You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges.

1. Select "LOGIC7" and press the controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller. LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.

To switch off the spatial sound effect: Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Equalizer You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

147

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

R ad

io

148

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands:

Listening to the radio

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".

4. Press the controller.

Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre- sets".

If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable, update the stations with the strongest received signal, refer to page 149.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the corre-

sponding direction. The system switches to the next displayed sta- tion. You can also change the station with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "All stations": Stations that can currently be received on the "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest received signals in the "AM" waveband.

> "Presets": Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 150.

To change the selection criterion:

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

149

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

1. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

2. Choose a selection criterion and press the controller.

Sampling stations, scan The stations on the current waveband are auto- matically sampled in succession.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Scan starts.

To stop the scan:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels the scan search, and the radio remains on the current station.

Buttons on the CD player To start scan, hold down the corre-

sponding direction button.

To stop scanning, press the button again.

Selecting the frequency manually With "Manual" you can select stations that are received in addition to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre- quency.

Updating stations with best reception If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals in the AM waveband.

1. Select "AM" and press the controller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

R ad

io

150

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.

Storing stations 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is chosen and press the controller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected. The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

7. Press the controller. The station is stored.

The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing a memory position 1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.

3. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

151

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected. The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

6. Press the controller. The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data System RDS transmits additional information in the FM frequency range. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Con- trol Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the dis- play.

Switching RDS on/off* 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler. "Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.

Weather reports* Weather Radio is a service provided by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administra- tion (NOAA) of the US Department of Com- merce. Weather reports are repeated every four to six minutes and routinely updated in intervals of one to three hours, or more frequently if nec- essary. Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In the event of storms, the National Weather Ser- vice interrupts the routine weather reports to broadcast special warnings. If you have any questions regarding NOAA Weather Radio, please contact your local National Weather Ser- vice office. You can also obtain more informa- tion from the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather reports 1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

2. Select the station.

The station for weather reports may be unavail- able in some regions.

High Definition Radio* Many stations transmit analog as well as digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally, resulting in better sound quality.

Switching digital radio reception on and off iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

R ad

io

152

3. Select "Entertainment settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "HD radio" and press the controller.

5. Select "Off" and press the controller. Digital radio reception is switched on.

This symbol appears in the display when a station is being received digitally.

Some stations do not transmit digital signals simultaneously with analog signals. If you are driving through an area in which digital signals are not consistently received from the selected station, the system switches between analog and digital reception. This can result in repeti- tions or interruptions. In such cases, it may be advisable to switch off digital radio reception.

Updating digitally receivable stations If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore " and press the con- troller.

The display of digitally receivable stations is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

153

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Displaying additional information With digital stations, additional information on the current track can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Select the station and press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is displayed.

If another digital station is received after chang- ing the station, the additional information will be shown again after a short pause.

Satellite radio* You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in

audio interruptions.<

Enabling or disabling channels iDrive concept, refer to page 22.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

3. Select "SAT".

4. Press the controller.

The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.

Enabling 1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is required to enable or disable.<

2. To enable the channel: Dial the phone number.

R ad

io

154

Disabling 1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis- played.

The electronic serial number is required to disable.<

3. To disable the channel: Dial the phone number.

Selecting and storing a channel 1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels are shown on the Control Display sorted on the basis of selection criteria.

2. Select a menu item:

> "Presets": Up to twelve channels you have stored previously.

> "All channels": All channels are displayed.

> "Categories": All channels, sorted by categories, e.g. news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

4. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym- bol.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

155

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

6. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional information The name of the channel and additional infor- mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1 Artist

2 Track

Storing a channel 1. Select the desired channel.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca- tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

Changing channels with buttons on CD player Press the button for the corre- sponding direction. The system switches to the next enabled chan- nel.

Notes If no signal can be received for more than four seconds, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Under some circumstances, e.g. depend- ing on environmental influences or topo-

graphic conditions, it may not be possible to receive any signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this. A signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise build- ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference. Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig- nal becomes available again.<

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

156

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Compressed audio files* CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.

Starting the CD player The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is on. When playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive:

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. On cars with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is switched on.

Starting the CD changer 1. Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to

page 160.

2. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

3. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

157

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select the desired CD and press the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD is selected and played.

If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga- zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.

The CD magazine's load status is indicated on the Control Display.

Selecting a track

Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track on the current CD is reached. The CD starts to play at the start of the track. The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive Turn the controller to select a track.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select a directory, if appropriate, and press

the controller.

2. Select a track and press the controller.

3. Select "Play" and press the controller.

To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

158

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying information about the track* With compressed audio files, any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is shown for the current track.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Sampling tracks, Scan All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

To stop the scan:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Scan is interrupted and the selected track is retained.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

159

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To sample all the tracks in the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.

> To sample all the tracks on the CD, select "Scan all" and press the control- ler.

Stop sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.

Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained.

Repeating tracks 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

Stop repeating:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.

> To repeat all the tracks in the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Stop repeating:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Random play sequence The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

160

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Stop random function:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To play all the tracks in the current direc- tory in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.

> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran- dom order, select "Random all" and press the controller.

Stop random function:

1. Press the controller

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction. The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.

CD magazine

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the luggage compartment.

Removing the CD magazine To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.

2. Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine is ejected.

Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Inserting CDs: Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on top.

Removing CDs: Pull out the desired drawer, refer to arrow, and remove the corresponding CD.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

161

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Inserting the CD magazine

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc- tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, otherwise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/ DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Care Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially avail- able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards.

E xt

er n

al a

u d

io d

ev ic

e

162

External audio device

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting Lift up the center armrest.

1 Power supply for your external audio device: Socket with removable cap

2 Connection for audio playback: 3.5 mm cinch connector

To play audio tracks through the car's loud- speaker system, connect the headset or line- out port of the external device to connection 2.

Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

3. Select "Audio Aux" and press the control- ler.

4. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

163

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Communications This chapter describes how to use the

telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.

T el

ep h

o n

in g

166

Telephoning

The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands.

Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run- ning or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.

Using the telephone inside the vehicle

Using the snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent repro- duction quality. Please contact your BMW Center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

BMW discourages the use of mobile phones or other mobile communications

devices inside the vehicle without a direct con- nection to an outside antenna. Otherwise, inter- ference between vehicle electronics systems and the mobile communications device cannot be ruled out. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation which results from transmis- sion will be dissipated from the vehicle inte- rior.<

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth- erwise malfunctions may result.

For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed description of safety precautions and informa- tion, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situa- tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the

mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis- tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones Please ask your BMW Center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and/ or which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones sup- port the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.

Care instructions You can find what you need to know about car- ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile phone Owner's Manual.

Operating options You can operate the mobile phone* using:

> The steering wheel, refer to page 10

> iDrive, refer to page 170

> Voice commands, refer to page 174

*

167

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Making calls with the car phone*: BMW Assist calls You can use the car phone via the hands-free system for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "BMW Assist" or "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica- tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con- nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.

Start-up

Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:

> The mobile phone is ready to operate

> The Bluetooth link in the vehicle, refer to page 169, and in the mobile phone are acti- vated

> Depending on the mobile phone, some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone: e.g. via the menu item Blue- tooth switched on or the menu item Con- nection without confirmation.

> For pairing purposes, define any number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue- tooth passkey is no longer required after pairing has been successful.

> The ignition is switched on.

Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid

endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Switch on ignition 1. Insert remote control all the way into the

ignition lock.

2. Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.

Preparation via iDrive iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to call up the start menu.

2. Call up the menu by pressing the control- ler.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

T el

ep h

o n

in g

168

Preparation via the mobile phone 6. Further steps must be carried out with the

mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Con- necting or Pairing.

Pairing Depending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first in the mobile phone's display or on the Control Display, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously deter- mined by you.

Message on the Control Display if the Bluetooth passkey can be entered via iDrive:

7. Select "Add device" and press the control- ler.

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.

9. Select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.

10. Wait several seconds until the list of paired mobile phones is displayed on the Control Display and "Phone" is selected.

To interrupt the mobile phone's pairing with the vehicle: Select "Refuse connection" and press the con- troller.

The next time you use the mobile phone inside the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more than two minutes as long as the engine is run- ning or the ignition is switched on.

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- ted to the vehicle. Refer also your mobile phone's operating instructions, if necessary. This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several minutes; please refer to your mobile phone's operating instruc- tions, if necessary.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired, the pairing data for the last mobile phone on the list is deleted, refer also to the information below.

List of paired mobile phones All mobile phones with pairing data stored by the vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile phones are detected by the vehicle at the same time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can be operated via the vehicle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile phones via the vehicle.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to call up the start menu.

2. Call up the menu by pressing the control- ler.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

169

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

7. Select "Move device up" and press the con- troller. The selected mobile phone moves up one position on the list.

Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle Should you no longer wish to operate your mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile phone's pairing data.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to call up the start menu.

2. Call up the menu by pressing the control- ler.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

7. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller. The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries which were trans- ferred from your mobile phone to the vehi- cle are also deleted in the process.

Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link

The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all

applicable local regulations. You can tempo- rarily disconnect the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary.<

If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Take the mobile phone out of the snap-in adapter and switch it off.

2. Press the button to call up the start menu.

T el

ep h

o n

in g

170

3. Select the menu and press the controller.

4. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

6. Select "Settings" and press the controller. The Bluetooth link is activated.

7. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac- tivate the link.

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions using iDrive:

> Dialing phone numbers

> Selecting phone numbers from the phone book

> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls

> Ending a call

When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.

Requirements The mobile phone's pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.

The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to call up "Communication".

Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num-

171

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call

Select "Accept" and press the controller.

Rejecting a call Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by select- ing the digits individually and pressing the controller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the numbers on the keypad of the mobile phone.

To delete an incorrect number or letter: Move the controller towards the right to select , and press the controller.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

Ending a call 1. Select the phone number and press the

controller.

2. Select "End call" and press the controller.

Selecting a phone number from the phone book or from a list of stored phone numbers Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls and phone book entries are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.

You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.

T el

ep h

o n

in g

172

Five lists are available:

> "A - Z" The entries in your mobile phone's phone book, consisting of names and phone num- bers, are sorted alphabetically.

> "Top 8" The eight numbers dialed most frequently from the "A - Z" phone book are automati- cally stored in the Top 8 list. The list is sorted by frequency.

> "Redial" The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.

> "Missed calls" The phone numbers of the last eight rejected calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.

> "Received calls" The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.

Selecting phone numbers from phone book The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. To limit the number of displayed entries, select the initial letter of the desired entry and press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.

You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

Dialing stored phone numbers from a list To select an entry and establish a connection:

173

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select a list and press the controller:

> "Top 8"

> "Redial"

> "Missed calls"

> "Received calls"

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

Deleting an individual entry 1. Select the desired entry from the list and

press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. The entry is deleted.

Deleting the entire list 1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.

Touch tone dialing Touch-tone code is required for access to net- work services or for controlling devices, e.g. for remote querying on an answering machine.

This function is available whenever there is a connection.

1. Establish connection.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Keypad" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired touch-tone buttonand press the controller. Each selection is transmitted immediately

T el

ep h

o n

in g

174

and is confirmed by a tone, depending on the type of mobile phone you are using.

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free system You can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.

With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:

> Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, you can continue the conversa- tion via the hands-free system, if necessary. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

> Press the button above the storage compartment. The changeover can take several seconds.

From hands-free system to mobile phone If you are making a call via the hands-free sys- tem, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone, if necessary, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

Operation by voice commands*

The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel. During your entries, you will be guided in many cases by announcements and questions.

The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 170.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Saying commands

Activating the system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

A sound signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command. The text or numbers that the voice com- mand system has registered will appear on the Control Display.

Ending/canceling operation by voice commands Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or

In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name rather than a command, canceling is only possi- ble using the button on the steering wheel.

Having the possible commands read aloud The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:

{...}Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the system.

{Cancel}.

{Help}

175

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Using alternative commands Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

Example: dialing phone numbers Start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Adjusting volume You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Turn the button during an instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

Correcting phone numbers After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting entry {Delete} is used to delete all the digits entered so far.

Voice phone book The phone book entries can be called up auto- matically from your mobile phone's memory.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

Command Response

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890} {{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}. The dialog for establishing a telephone connection is opened.

2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.

3. {Dial}. The connection to the desired sub- scriber is established.

{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.

T el

ep h

o n

in g

176

Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

Redialing The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".

Notes The commands in English were available as of this printing. Other languages are

currently in preparation. To operate the mobile phone via the voice command system, refer to page 22.<

Important for voice commands For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:

> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive empha- ses and pauses.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Inserting/removing snap-in adapter 1. Press area 1 around the button and take off

the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press area 1 around the button.

Inserting mobile phone 1. If applicable, remove the protective cap

from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical con-

1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

177

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

tact points and press it downward until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer- ing is unlocked.

To conserve battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone when the

ignition is switched off.<

Remove the mobile phone Press the button.

T el

eS er

vi ce

, B M

W A

ss is

t

178

TeleService , BMW Assist

TeleService TeleService supports you when communicat- ing with a BMW Center. The built-in car phone can be used to transmit data on the service sta- tus of your vehicle or legally mandated inspec- tions directly to your BMW Center. This is the same data that is also stored for CBS Condition Based Service in the remote control. Your BMW Center can then contact you, and you can make an appointment that suits you while you are still on the road. Your advantage here is that your BMW Center can prepare in advance for the required maintenance work. The TeleService functions are country-specific: depending on the country in which you are driving, data on your vehicle's service status or legally man- dated inspections are transmitted to your BMW Center either automatically before a service due date or when you place a call to the BMW Cen- ter. Your BMW Center will be glad to provide more detailed information.

BMW Assist BMW Assist provides you with other services in addition to TeleService. For example, the posi- tion data of your vehicle can be transferred to the BMW Assist response center if an emer- gency call* has been initiated.

Many functions of BMW Assist depend on the individually agreed contract. Data transmission, e.g. of the CBS Condition Based Service, differs from country to country.

A subscriber contract for BMW Assist must be signed and enabling must be completed before you can use BMW Assist.

If your subscription contract with BMW Assist expires, the car phone can be deactivated by a BMW Center without having to schedule an appointment at a workshop. Once the car phone has been deactivated, emergency calls are not possible. The car phone can be reacti-

vated by a BMW Center after signing a new contract.

You can also utilize BMW Assist services via the Internet. The range of services offered is expanded continually.

Requirements You can use TeleService or BMW Assist when the following requirements are met:

> The installed car phone is logged on to a mobile telephone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser- vices.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position. This can be displayed on the Control Dis- play.

> A GPS signal must be available in order for TeleService or BMW Assist to be enabled and updated.

> For BMW Assist: you must have applied for BMW Assist at your BMW Center or BMW customer service.

Enabling TeleService or BMW Assist For you to be able to use the services of TeleService or BMW Assist, these must be enabled.

Requirements > Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current location. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> Leave radio readiness switched on while connecting to the system.

Enabling iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

* *

179

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con- troller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist are enabled; data exchange with the service center starts.

Enabling takes a few minutes. The status is dis- played on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the enabling process continues to run in the background.

Services offered The following special features apply for the ser- vices of TeleService and BMW Assist:

> The services offered are country-specific.

> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.

> The data transferred can be the vehicle data, your current position or the data of the CBS Condition Based Service.

Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on legally mandated inspections is transmitted automatically directly to your BMW Center prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW Center was notified.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "Service requirements" and press the controller.

5. Select "Service notification" and press the controller.

T el

eS er

vi ce

, B M

W A

ss is

t

180

Roadside Assistance You can call the Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group should you require help in the event of a breakdown.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Select "BMW Assist" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.

If the current position can be determined, the current vehicle location is displayed.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

Contact with Roadside Assistance will be established.

Setting up contact with your BMW Center or BMW Customer Relations You can contact your BMW Center, e.g. to arrange a service appointment.

For information related to your vehicle, call the BMW Customer Relations.

A prerequisite for this is that your mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service" and press the con- troller.

5. Select the desired BMW Center:

> "Service Request"

> "Customer Relations"

6. Press the controller.

7. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

Contact with the desired BMW Center will be established.

Adapting TeleService or BMW Assist

Displaying and updating services If the services offered by TeleService or BMW Assist change, you will be notified. In this case you should update the service functions.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.

181

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con- troller.

The current services available from TeleService or BMW Assist are displayed.

6. If applicable, select "Options"and press the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.

Terminating services When you terminate services, the connection to BMW Assist is deactivated.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Service Status" and press the con- troller.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.

TeleService or BMW Assist is blocked from use, and your vehicle's current position will not be transmitted during an emergency call*. To cancel the service block, the system must be reactivated, refer to page 178. Your contractual agreement is not affected by this.

The automatic service notification can be dis- abled separately. Please contact your BMW Center for this purpose.

Enable TeleService and, if applicable, BMW Assist once again to log on again.

Displaying vehicle data When TeleService or BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle can be displayed.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Communication settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Profile" and press the controller.

To adjust the license plate, please contact your BMW Center.

BMW Contact* You can establish a voice connection to the fol- lowing services without enabling BMW Assist as long as your mobile phone is paired with the vehicle:

> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group if you need help in the event of a breakdown

> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser- vice appointment, for example

> BMW Customer Relations* for information related to your vehicle

iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

T el

eS er

vi ce

, B M

W A

ss is

t

182

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con- troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.

5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:

> "Roadside Assistance"

> "Customer Relations"

> "Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact will be established.

183

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Mobility This section helps you maintain your car's

mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and breakdown assistance.

R ef

u el

in g

186

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu- eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to

the tank and a message will be displayed.<

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<

Gas cap

Opening

1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.

2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not jam the strap attached to the gas cap between the gas cap and the vehicle.

A message will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler door In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side panel of the luggage compartment.

2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.

Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels always observe any safety guidelines posted at the service

station.<

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting the filler nozzle during refueling leads to

> premature pump shutoff

> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 16.1 US gallons/61 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel specifications Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the

catalytic converter.<

M o

b il

it y

187

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Required fuel

Premium Unleaded Gasoline The minimum octane rating is 91. If you use gasoline with this minimum octane rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside tempera- tures. This has no affect on the engine life.

Minimum octane rating corresponds to the Anti Knock Index AKI and is determined according to the so-called (R+M)/2 method.

Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the

catalytic converter.<

Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif- ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain- ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental condi- tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

188

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi- tion that can not only compromise your vehi- cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam- age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After correcting tire inflation pressures, always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,

refer to page 88.<

Inflation pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom-

mended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW Center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressures, observe the following:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Load conditions

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust

pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.

M o

b il

it y

189

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for the 323i, for Canada only

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package

225/50 R 16 92 V 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

29/200 33/230 29/200 33/230 30/210 38/260

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 29/200 35/240 29/200 35/240 32/220 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 30/210 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 39/270 - 33/230 - 39/270

with Sports package

225/50 R 16 92 V 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

29/200 33/230 29/200 35/240 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 29/200 35/240 30/210 38/260 36/250 45/310

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 33/230 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y_XL - 39/270 - 36/250 - 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

190

Tire inflation pressures for the 325i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package

225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

33/230 41/280 - - 33/230 41/280

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 29/200 - 29/200 - 32/220 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 35/240 - 41/280

with Sports package

225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S

33/230 41/280 - - 35/240 42/290

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 - - 38/260 45/310

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 29/200 - 29/200 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 33/230 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 33/230 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 36/250 - 42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

M o

b il

it y

191

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for the 325xi

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package:

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

30/210 36/250 30/210 33/230 35/240 41/280

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 30/210 - 30/210 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 32/220 - 35/240

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 35/240 - 41/280

with Sports package:

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S

30/210 36/250 30/210 33/230 35/240 41/280

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 30/210 36/250 35/240 38/260 39/270 45/310

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 30/210 - 33/230 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 33/230 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 38/260 - 42/290 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 38/260 - 44/300

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

192

Tire inflation pressures for the 330i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package:

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

33/230 41/280 - - 33/230 41/280

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 29/200 - 29/200 - 33/230 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 36/250 - 41/280

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y - - 29/200 - 30/210 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - - - 32/220 - 36/250

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 32/220 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 36/250 - 41/280

with Sports package:

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

33/230 41/280 - - 38/260 45/310

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 29/200 - 32/220 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 38/260 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 38/260 - 45/310

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y - - 30/210 - 33/230 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - - - 33/230 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 38/260

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 38/260 - 45/310

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

M o

b il

it y

193

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for the 330xi

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph / 160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sports package:

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL

32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 33/230 - 39/270

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 32/220 - 36/250

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 35/240 - 41/280

with Sports package:

225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280

225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 36/250 35/240 39/270 39/270 45/310

Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -

Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 38/260 - 42/290 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 38/260 - 44/300

Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 33/230 - 36/250 -

Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 33/230 - 39/270

Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 38/260 - 42/290 -

Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 38/260 - 44/300

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 220.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

194

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed code letter Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transport.

DOT code:

Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT 0705 means that the tire was manufactured in week 7 of 2005.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

225/45 R 17 91 V

e.g.

Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 0705

M o

b il

it y

195

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC Run-Flat Tires You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 196.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of

1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazard and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW Center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Tire damage can be extremely dangerous for vehicle occupants and other road users.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

196

Tire age For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace- ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 0705 means that the tire was manufac- tured in week 07 of 2005.

Run-Flat Tires

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self- supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce- ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric- tions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 89.

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW Center or tire shop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal- anced.<

Retreaded tires BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may

be impaired. The causes for this include poten- tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

Correct wheels and tires BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com- bination at your BMW Center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been dam- aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi- nation again as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the high- est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

M o

b il

it y

197

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Run-Flat Tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, moreover, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW Center will be glad to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends that damaged Run-Flat Tires be replaced

rather than repaired.<

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure

to do so could result in tire damage and acci- dents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW Center can supply these labels.

Storage Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Snow chains* Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW Center for more information. Attach snow chains in pairs and only to the rear wheels. Observe the manu-

facturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.

You are not permitted to mount snow chains to tires of the following sizes:

> 255/40 R 17

> 255/35 R 18

> 255/30 R 19

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 85.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

198

Under the hood

Do not work on the car unless you pos- sess the necessary technical knowledge.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide- lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW Center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Opening

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may

result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<

M o

b il

it y

199

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Important parts of the engine compartment

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 201

2 Washer fluid reservoir for headlamp clean- ing system and window washer system, refer to page 60

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 212

4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

5 Reservoir for brake fluid, under the cover of the microfilter

Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

For a precise measurement and display of the oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature, e.g. after uninterrupted driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

Display in the instrument cluster

1. Lightly push button 1 in the turn indicator stalk up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".

2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator stalk. The oil level is checked and the reading dis- played.

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

200

Possible displays

1 Oil level OK

2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

3 Oil level down to minimum: Add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil as soon as possible, refer also to Adding engine oil.

4 Oil level is too high.

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 203. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive iDrive concept, refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Service" and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con- troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is dis- played.

Possible messages > "Engine oil level O.K."

> "No measured value available: Updating engine oil level measurement..." The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand- still on a level surface and the engine is run- ning, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart engine oil." Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below.

> "Engine oil level too high"

M o

b il

it y

201

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

> "Please observe recalculated service inter- val for engine oil" Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 74. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add the maximum amount of 1 US quart/ 1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding mes- sage is shown on the Control Display.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the warnings on

the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<

Oil change Have oil changed only at your BMW Center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Specified engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with the API SH specification or higher.

Your BMW Center will be glad to answer any questions regarding BMW High Per-

formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Viscosity ratings Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.

Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends on the regional climatic conditions in which you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and 5W-30 classes.<

These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.

Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit- able for your BMW. Ask your BMW Center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives

are hazardous to your health.<

Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when dis-

posing of coolant additives.<

Checking coolant level 1. The engine must be at ambient tempera-

ture.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

202

pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

Brake system

Malfunctions

Brake fluid The warning lamps light up in red even though the handbrake has been released. A message appears on the Control Display. Stop immediately.

The brake fluid in the reservoir has fallen to below the minimum level. At the same time, a considerably longer brake pedal travel may be noticeable. Have the system checked without delay.

Display of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

If you continue to drive the car, you may have to depress the brake more and brak-

ing distances may be significantly longer. Please adapt your driving style accordingly.<

Brake pads The warning lamps light up in red even though the handbrake has been released. A message appears on the Control Display. The brake pads have

reached the safe limit for pad wear. Have brake pads replaced immediately.

Display of this malfunction on Cana- dian models.

For your own safety: use only brake pads that BMW has approved for the corre-

sponding vehicle model. BMW is unable to assess the suitability of brake pads it has not approved and therefore cannot guarantee their safety.<

M o

b il

it y

203

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com- prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig- nificant benefit.

CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main- tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 74:

> Engine oil

> Brakes: separately for front and rear

> Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

> Brake fluid

> Spark plugs

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote control Your vehicle continuously stores service- requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi- sor can read out this data from the remote con- trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte- nance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set cor- rectly, refer to page 78; otherwise the

effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW Center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

M ai

n te

n an

ce

204

Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD

Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.

This socket is located on the driver's side to the left, on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover.

Exhaust emission values The warning lamps come on. The exhaust emission values have wors- ened. Have the car checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display these warn- ing lamps.

The lamps flash under certain condi- tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW Center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions- related components, especially the catalytic converter.

If the gas cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system will assume that fuel vapor is escaping. An indicator will then light up. If the gas cap is then tightened, the indicator will go out within a few days.

Event data recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle

data or information. In addition, if you have signed a subscription contract for BMW Assist, certain vehicle data may be transmitted or recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding services.

Care Important information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

M o

b il

it y

205

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Replacing components

Onboard tool kit

The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the luggage compart- ment. Remove the cover.

Wiper blades

1. Fold up the wiper arm.

2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook on the bottom, see arrow.

3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.

4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the windshield, see arrow.

In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the engine compartment.<

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav- ing your BMW Center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW Center.

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<

For care and maintenance of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact

your BMW Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

206

lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours at a time, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.<

Xenon lamps* The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of a failure is very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an unusual number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe- less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local leg- islation does not prohibit this.

Have work on the xenon lighting system performed only by your BMW Center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Due to the high electrical voltages present, there is a risk of potentially fatal acci- dents if work is performed inappropriate.<

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Halogen lamps H7 bulb, 55 watts

Always wear gloves and eye protection; the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

There are separate headlamp covers for low- beam headlamps and high-beam headlamps.

Be careful when installing the covers, oth- erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-

age to the headlamp system.<

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW Center.<

Access to the lamps The high-beam headlamp can be accessed from the engine compartment, whereas the

low-beam headlamp is accessed through a flap in the wheel well.

1 Cover for high-beam headlamp

2 Cover for low-beam headlamp

3 Turn signal bulb socket

To remove the covers:

1. Fold the respective wire bracket to the side, see arrows.

2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the guide.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat- tach the covers.

Access through the wheel well Only for low-beam headlamps and turn signals:

1. Turn the wheel inwards.

2. Open the flap in the wheel well. To do so, turn the fastener counterclockwise using a coin, for example.

Changing low-beam and high-beam bulbs 1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-

lamp.

2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.

M o

b il

it y

207

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down, arrow 2.

4. Remove the bulb.

5. Insert new bulb as shown in the detail of the illustration above.

6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.

7. Connect the plug.

8. Reattach the cover.

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps 5 watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Remove the cover for the high-beam head- lamp.

2. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

4. Insert bulb socket.

5. Reattach the cover.

Turn signals, front 21 watt bulb, PY 21 W or PY 21 W Silver Vision

1. Open the flap in the wheel well, refer to Access through the wheel well on page 206.

2. Rotate turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left and remove.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

4. Insert turn signal bulb socket 1.

5. Attach the flap to the wheel well.

Side-mounted turn signals In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Tail lamps > Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid

21 watt bulb, H 21 W

> Other lamps: 21 watt bulb, P 21 W

The tail lamps are divided into two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

208

1 Brake lamp

2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp

3 Turn signal

4 Backup lamp

5 Tail lamp

6 Brake lamp

Fender-mounted lamps

1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the luggage compartment or release the turn- lock fastener by turning it counterclockwise and remove the cover.

2. Unfasten the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and pull out.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

5. Reattach the cover in the luggage compart- ment.

Lamps in the luggage compartment lid

1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the luggage compartment lid using a screw- driver and remove the trim.

2. Unfasten the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and remove.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replace- ment.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.

5. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart- ment lid.

License plate lamp 5 watt bulb, C 5 W

1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the right in the flap of the lamp housing.

2. Take out the lamp towards the left and change the bulb.

3. Insert the lamp.

Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW Center or a workshop that works

M o

b il

it y

209

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as standard. This removes the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.

The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 196.

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, moreover, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW Center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 196.

The tools for changing wheels are avail- able as optional accessories from your

BMW Center.<

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW Center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging the battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 212.

Disposal Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW Center or hand them in to a recy-

cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<

Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require ini- tialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be reprogrammed:

> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 77.

> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 150.

> Navigation system Operability must be waited for, refer to page 124.

> Seat and mirror memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 44.

> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 105.

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth- erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti- mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

210

Open the cover in the glove compartment and remove it.

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box.

See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment.

M o

b il

it y

211

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency calling* Conditions for an emergency call:

> Full preparation package mobile phone

> BMW Assist is enabled. Enabling BMW Assist, refer to page 178.

> Radio readiness is on.

> The car phone is logged on to a mobile tele- phone network.

> The emergency call system is operable.

If your subscription contract with BMW Assist expires, the car phone can be deactivated by a BMW Center without having to schedule an appointment at a workshop. Once the car phone has been deactivated, emergency calls are not possible. The car phone can be reacti- vated by a BMW Center after signing a new contract.

Initiating an emergency call 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist response center has been established, the LED flashes.

If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been estab- lished. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

If the current location of your vehicle can be determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist response center.

If the LED is flashing but the emergency response center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The emergency response center may still be able to hear you, however.

Under certain conditions, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. The automatic emergency call is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable

conditions.<

Roadside Assistance The BMW Group's Roadside Assistance ser- vice is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown, including on week- ends and public holidays.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.

In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService, you can establish contact with the BMW Group's Roadside Assistance for break- down assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 180.

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

212

First aid pouch*

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment in a storage area.

Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents reg- ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec- essary.

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment. Press the tab to take it out.

Jump starting If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise

there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could

cause injury occur at the battery.<

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat- tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 199. The cap is marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con- nection up to remove.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi- cle providing assistance.

3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal

M o

b il

it y

213

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting, towing away Observe the applicable laws and regula- tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-

cles.<

Do not transport any occupants other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath the cover on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment, refer to page 205.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Access to screw thread Rectangular cover panel in bumper: Press on the upper edges of the cover panel.

Front

Rear

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 52, otherwise the low-beam

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

214

headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable. If the electrical system fails, do not attempt to tow- start or tow away the car. The electric steering wheel lock cannot be disengaged and the car is not steerable. Jump starting, refer to page 212. Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend- ing on local regulations.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in idle position.

Automatic transmission Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever positions, refer to page 57.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph or 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.<

Sequential manual gearbox SMG With the ignition switched on, engage selector lever position N, and then switch the ignition back off.

Towing with a tow bar The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle

could result in damage.<

Towing with a tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<

Towing with a tow truck

323i*, 325i, 330i

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-

age may result.<

325xi, 330xi Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised, otherwise the

wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.<

Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface only.

M o

b il

it y

215

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tow-starting If the electrical system fails, do not attempt to tow-start or tow away the car.

The electric steering wheel lock cannot be dis- engaged and the car is not steerable. Jump starting, refer to page 212.<

Do not tow-start vehicles with an auto- matic transmission. Only tow-start vehi-

cles with a catalytic converter with the engine cold. It is better to jump start the engine, refer to page 212.<

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 52.

3. Shift into 3rd gear. Vehicles with SMG, see below.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch completely depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi- ately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Vehicles with sequential manual gearbox SMG:

1. Have the vehicle tow-started with the selec- tor lever in position N.

2. Select sequential mode. The correct gear is automatically engaged.

325xi, 330xi: do not activate Hill Descent Control HDC when the vehicle is being

tow-started, page 86.<

Reference This chapter contains technical data,

short commands for the voice command system and an index that will help you

find information most quickly.

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

218

Technical data

Engine data

323i (Canada) 325i/xi 330i/xi

Displacement cu in/cm 152.4/2,497 182.8/2,996 182.8/2,996

Number of cylinders 6 6 6

Maximum power output hp 215 255

at engine speed rpm 6,250 6,600

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 185/251 220/298

at engine speed rpm 2,750 2,750

R e

fe re

n ce

219

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dimensions

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m. All wheel drive: 38 ft 9 in/11.8 m.

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

220

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

323i (Canada) 325i 325xi

Curb weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,274/1,485 3,285/1,490 3,560/1,615

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,329/1,510 3,351/1,520 3,605/1,635

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,332/1,965 4,343/1,970 4,619/2,095

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,387/1,990 4,409/2,000 4,663/2,115

Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480 1,058/480

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,083/945 2,072/940 2,282/1,035

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090 2,425/1,100 2,480/1,125

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460 16.2/460 16.2/460

330i 330xi

Curb weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,417/1,550 3,627/1,645

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,450/1,565 3,671/1,665

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030 4,685/2,125

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,508/2,045 4,729/2,145

Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,138/970 2,315/1,050

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120 2,513/1,140

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460 16.2/460

R e

fe re

n ce

221

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 187

including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0

Window washer system For more details: page 60

including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0

Engine with oil filter renewal US quarts/liters approx. 6.9/6.5 BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil

Oil grades: page 201

S ho

rt c

o m

m an

d s

fo r t

h e

vo ic

e co

m m

an d

s ys

te m

222

Short commands for the voice command system

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To call up assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or {Assistance window onboard info}

To change the scale in the assistance window 138

{Assistance window scale ... feet} or {Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To open phone 171 {Phone}

To dial phone number 171 {Dial number}

To display phone book 171 {A to Z}

To select from phone book 171 {Call ...} or {Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 171 {Top 8}

Redialing 171 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 171 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 171 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 167 {Bluetooth}

To call up BMW Assist 178 {BMW Assist}

To open "BMW Service" 180 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 181 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 181 {BMW Contact numbers}

R e

fe re

n ce

223

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To call up navigation 130 {Navigation}

To display current position 140 {Current position}

To open "Enter address" 125 {Enter address}

To open "New destination" 125 {New destination}

To display "Input map" 129 {Input map}

To open "Information" 130 {Info menu}

To display address book 132 {Address book} or {From address book}

To display destination list 131 {Destination list}

To switch on destination guidance 136 {Start guidance}

To switch off destination guidance 136 {Stop guidance}

To display route criteria 135 {Route preference}

To switch on voice instructions 139 {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions 139 {Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions 139 {Repeat navigation info}

To show arrow display 137 {Arrow display}

To display map 138 {Map}, {Map facing north}, {Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}

To call up a route 127, 136 {Route}

To open "New route" 140 {New route}

To change scale 138 {Scale ... miles} or {Scale ... feet}

To display towns/cities and streets along the route 139

{Route list}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 71 {Car Data}

To display onboard info 71 {Onboard info}

To display trip computer 71 {Trip computer}

To open speed limit 81 {Limit}

To open stopwatch 81 {Stopwatch}

S ho

rt c

o m

m an

d s

fo r t

h e

vo ic

e co

m m

an d

s ys

te m

224

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 145 {Audio}

To switch on radio 148 {Radio on}, {FM on} or {AM on}

To open "FM" 148 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 148 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 148 {FM All stations}

To select radio station 148 {Station} name or {Choose station}

To open "Presets" 148 {FM presets} or {AM presets}

To select radio presets 148 {Choose preset}

To open "Manual" 149 {FM manual} or {AM manual}or {Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open strongest radio station 149 {AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 151 {Weather Band menu}

To switch on Weather Band 151 {Weather Band on}

To select Weather Band station 151 {Choose Weather Band station}

To open "SAT" 154 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 154 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 155 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 154 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 154 {SAT radio categories}

To call up CD player 156 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 156 {CD}

To call up CD changer 156 {CD changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 156 {CD changer}

To select CD 156 {CD 1...6}

To select track 157 {CD track ...}

To select CD and track 157 {CD 1...6 track ...}

To select track 157 {Track ...}

To call up DVD 156 {DVD player menu}

R e

fe re

n ce

225

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

menu

To switch on DVD 156 {DVD player}

To select music track on DVD 157 {DVD track ...}

To start sound output for external audio device 162

{Audio Aux on}

Function Command

Function Command

To open "Vent settings" 98 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 99 {Automatic programs}

Function Command

To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 47 {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 59 {Lighting}

To open "Communication settings" 178 {Communication settings}

To open "BMW Service settings" 178 {BMW Service settings}

To open "BMW Service" 180 {BMW Service}

To open "Service requirements" 75, 179 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 75, 179 {Service}

To display "Check Control messages" 78 {Check Control messages}

To open "Display settings" 82 {Display settings}

To activate road-speed limit 81 {Limit on}

To deactivate road-speed limit 81 {Limit off}

To set brightness of Control Display 82 {Brightness}

To open "Units" 69 {Units}

To open "Languages" 82, 139 {Languages}

To open "Time" 77 {Time}

To open "Date" 78 {Date}

To open "PDC" 83 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 88 {FTM}

To open "Entertainment settings" 145 {Entertainment settings}

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

226

Everything from A-Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 84 ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 62 Acceleration assistant with

the sequential manual gearbox SMG 57

Accessories, refer to The individual vehicle 5

Activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 101

"Activation time" 101 Active cruise control 62 indicator lamps 65 malfunction 66 selecting distance 64 sensor 66 Active steering 89 warning lamp 89 Adapter for spare key 28 Adaptive Head Light 95 "Add digits" for mobile

phone 172 Additives coolant 201 "Address book" in

navigation 132 Address for navigation deleting 133 entering 125, 128, 132 selecting 133 storing 132 storing current position 132

"Add to destination list" 128, 129

Adjusting temperature inside the car, refer to Automatic climate control 98

Adjusting the tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 145

Adjustment in audio mode front-to-rear 145 right/left balance 145 Airbags 90 sitting safely 40 warning lamp 92 Air conditioning mode automatic climate control 98 ventilation 100 Air distribution automatic 98 individual 98 Air flow rate 99 Airing, refer to Ventilation 100 Air pressure, tires 188 Air recirculation, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 99 "Air recirculation on / off" 47 Air supply automatic climate control 98 ventilation 100 Air vents 97 AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 186 Alarm system 34 avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 interior motion sensor 35 switching off an alarm 34 tilt alarm sensor 35 "All channels" 154 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 197 "All stations", calling up on

radio 148

"AM", waveband 144, 148 Ambient air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 99 Antenna for mobile phone 166 Antifreeze coolant 201 washer fluid 60 Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 34 Anti-theft system 30 Anti-trapping mechanism glass sunroof, electric 39 windows 37 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 220 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 220 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 106 Arrival time computer 71 destination guidance 136 "Arrow display" in

navigation 137 Ashtray front 107 rear 108 Assist, refer to BMW

Assist 178 Assistance systems, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 84

Assistance window 20 refer to iDrive 20 AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 99 Audio 144 controls 144 switching on/off 144 tone control 145 volume 145 "Audio Aux" 144, 162

R e

fe re

n ce

227

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Audio device, external 107, 162

"Audio" tone settings 145 "Auto. headlamps" 94 Automatic air distribution 98 air flow rate 98 cruise control 60, 62 headlamp control 93 service notification 179 storing of stations 149 Automatic climate control 97 automatic air distribution 98 settings via iDrive 98 Automatic curb monitor 46 "Automatic programs" with

automatic climate control 99 Automatic recirculated-air

control AUC 99 Automatic station search 149 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 interlock 57 overriding selector lever

lock 58 shiftlock 57 sport program 58 "Automatic ventilation" 101 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 98 "Autostore" on the radio 150 AUX-IN 162 port 107 Average fuel consumption 71 setting the units 73 Average speed 70 "Avoid ferries" in

navigation 135 "Avoid highways" in

navigation 135 Avoid highways in

navigation 135 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 35 "Avoid tollroads" in

navigation 135 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 220

"A - Z" 172

B Backrests, refer to Seats 40 Backrest width adjustment 42 Back seats refer to Rear seats Backup lamps replacing bulbs 208 Backup lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 207 Balance, tone control 145 Band-aids, refer to First-aid

pouch 212 Bar, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 214 Bass, tone control 145 Bass sounds, refer to Tone

control 145 Bass sounds, refer to Treble

and bass 145 Battery 209 charging 209 disposal 37, 209 jump starting 212 temporary power failure 209 Battery renewal remote control 37 Being towed 213 Belts, refer to Safety belts 45 Belt tensioner, refer to Safety

belts 45 Beverage holders, refer to

Cup holders 107 Black ice, refer to Outside

temperature warning 69 Blower, refer to Air flow

rate 99 BMW Assist 178 enabling 178 services offered 179 "BMW Contact" 182 "BMW Contact

Numbers" 182 BMW Homepage 4 BMW Maintenance

System 203 "BMW Service" 180

"BMW Service settings" 179 BMW webpage 4 Bottle holders, refer to Cup

holders 107 Brake assist, refer to Dynamic

Brake Control 84 Brake fluid 202 level too low 202 warning lamp 202 Brake fluid, refer to Service

requirements 74 Brake Force Display 90 Brake hydraulics, refer to

Brakes 202 Brake lamps Brake Force Display 90 replacing bulbs 208 Brake pads, breaking in 116 Brake rotors 118 brakes 116 breaking in 116 Brakes ABS 84 BMW Maintenance

System 203 brake fluid 202 brake pads 202 breaking in 116 handbrake 54 service requirements 74 Brakes, refer to Braking

safely 117 Brake system 116 BMW Maintenance

System 203 brake fluid 202 brake pads 202 breaking in 116 disc brakes 118 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 211 Breaking in sequential manual gearbox

SMG 116 Breaking in the clutch 116 Breaking in the

differential 116 Break-in period 116

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

228

"Brightness"on the control display 82

Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 205

Burned fuel refer to Average

consumption 71 Button for starting engine 52 Buttons on steering wheel 11

C California Proposition 65

warning 6 "Call" 172 Call accepting 170 displaying accepted 172 ending 171 in absence 172 starting 171 Calling from phone book 171 from Top 8 list 172 redialing 172 Can holders, refer to Cup

holders 107 Capacities 221 Capacity of luggage

compartment 220 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 209 Car care, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure Car-care products, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

"Car Data" 71 Care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Cargo, securing 119 Cargo loading stowing cargo 119 vehicle 118 Caring for artificial leather,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for light-alloy wheels, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for plastic, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Car jack jacking points 209 Car key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 28 Car phone 166 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 106 refer to Mobile phone 166 refer to separate Owner's

Manual Car radio, refer to Radio 148 Car wash 118 also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 116 "Categories" 154 CBS Condition Based

Service 203 "CD" 144, 156 CD changer 156 controls 144 fast forward/reverse 160 installation location 160 playing a track 158 random order 159 repeating a track 159 selecting a CD 156 selecting a track 157 switching on/off 144 tone control 145 volume 145

CD player 156 controls 144 fast forward/reverse 160 playing a track 158 random order 159 repeating a track 159 selecting a track 157 switching on/off 144 tone control 145 volume 145 Center armrest 106 Center brake lamp replacing bulbs 208 Center console, refer to

Around the center console 14

"Central locking" 30 Central locking from inside 32 from outside 29 Central locking system 29 convenient access 35 Changing bulbs 205 Changing the language on the

Control Display 82 Changing the measurement

units on the Control Display 73

Changing wheels 209 Chassis number, refer to

Engine compartment 199 Check Control 79 "Check Control

messages" 80 Check Gas Cap 186 Checking the air pressure,

refer to Tire inflation pressure 188

Child-restraint fixing system LATCH 50

Child-restraint systems 49 Child-safety lock 51 Child seats 49 Chrome parts, care, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cigarette lighter 108 socket 108

R e

fe re

n ce

229

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Cleaning, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cleaning headlamps 60 washer fluid 60 "Climate" 98 Clock 69 12h/24h mode 78 setting time 77 Closing from inside 32 from outside 30 Clothes hooks 107 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 53 Combined instrument, refer to

Instrument cluster 12 Comfort Access, refer to

Convenient access 35 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 14 "Communication" 170 "Communication

settings" 179 Compact disc, refer to CD changer 156 CD player 156 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 52

Compass 104 Computer 70 displays on Control

Display 71 hour signal 78 Computer, refer to iDrive 16 "Concert hall" tone

settings 146 Condensation, refer to When

the vehicle is parked 118 Configuring settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29 Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking of the vehicle 31

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108

Consumption display average consumption 71 Consumption indicator Energy Control 70 "Continue guidance to

destination?" 137 Control Center, refer to

iDrive 16 Control Display settings 73 switching on/off 21 Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls and displays 10 Control unit, refer to iDrive 16 Convenience operation windows 30 Convenience start, refer to

Starting the engine 53 Convenient access 35 replacing the battery 37 what to observe before

entering a car wash 36 Convenient operation windows with convenient

access 36 with convenient access 36 Coolant 201 adding 201 checking level 201 Coolant temperature 69 Cooling, maximum 98 Cooling fluid, refer to

Coolant 201 Cornering lamps, refer to

Adaptive Head Light 95 Country of destination for

navigation 126 Courtesy lamps 96 Cross-hairs in navigation 129 Cruise control 60 active 62 malfunction 62 Cruising range 70 Cup holders 107 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 220

Current consumption, refer to Energy Control 70

"Current position" 140 Current position displaying 140 entering 132 storing 132 "Customer

Relations" 180, 182

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10 Dashboard, refer to

Instrument cluster 12 Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 96 Data 218 capacities 221 dimensions 219 engine 218 weights 220 "Date" 79 Date setting 78 setting format 79 "Date format" 79 Daytime driving lamps 94 "Daytime running light" 95 DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 84 DCC, refer to Cruise

control 60 "Deactivated" 44 Deactivating front passenger

airbags 91 Deadlocking, refer to

Locking 30 Decommissioning the vehicle refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Defect door lock 32 fuel filler door 186 glass sunroof 39 Defogging windows 100 Defrosting windows 100

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

230

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

automatic climate control 100

Defrosting windshield, refer to Defrosting windows 100

Defrost position, refer to Defrosting windows 100

"Delete address book" in navigation 134

"Delete all numbers" on the mobile phone 173

"Delete data" in navigation 134

"Delete" for mobile phone 173

Destination address deleting 133 entering 125, 128 Destination for navigation entry 125 navigation list 131 selecting from address

book 133 selecting using

information 130 storing 132 Destination guidance 136 bypassing route

sections 140 canceling voice

instructions 48 changing specified

route 134 displaying route 137 displaying routes 137 distance and arrival 136 interrupting 136 starting 136 terminating/continuing 136 voice instructions 139 volume of voice

instructions 139 Destination list for navigation

system 131 Destinations recently driven

to 131 "Dial" for mobile phone 171 "Dial number" 171

Digital clock 69 Digital compass 104 Digital radio 151 Dimensions 219 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 58 Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 139 Directory for navigation, refer

to Address book 132 Displacement, refer to Engine

data 218 Display, refer to iDrive

controls 16 Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 96 "Display off" 21 Displays instrument cluster 12 on the Control Display 16 Displays and controls 10 "Display settings" 77 Disposal coolant 201 remote control battery 37 vehicle battery 209 Distance control, refer to

Active cruise control 62 Distance remaining to service,

refer to Service requirements 74

"Distance to dest." 71 Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 83

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28

Door lock 32 Door locking, confirmation

signals 31 "Door locks" 30 Doors, emergency

operation 32 DOT Quality Grades 194 Draft-free ventilation 100 Drinks holders, refer to Cup

holders 107 Drive mode 56 Drive-off assistant 87

Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 93

Driving notes 116 Driving route, refer to

Displaying route 137 Driving stability control

systems 84 Driving through water 117 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 116 Dry air, refer to Cooling

function 100 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 84 DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 85 indicator lamps 85 DVD for navigation 124 Dynamic Driving Control 56 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC indicator lamps 85

E EBV Electronic brake-force

distribution 84 Eject button, refer to Buttons

on the CD player 144 Electrical malfunction door lock 32 fuel filler door 186 glass sunroof 39 panorama glass roof 39 Electric seat adjustment 41 Electronic brake-force

distribution 84 Electronic oil level check 199 Emergency call 211 Emergency operation, refer to

Closing manually glass sunroof 39 panorama glass roof 39 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation door lock 32 fuel filler door 186 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 58

R e

fe re

n ce

231

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Emergency release luggage compartment lid

from inside 34 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 211 Emissions test, refer to

Service requirements 74 "Enable services" 179 "End call" 171 Energy-conscious driving,

refer to Energy Control 70 Energy Control 70 Engine breaking in 116 data 218 overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 69 speed 218 starting 53 starting, convenient

access 35 switching off 53 Engine compartment 199 Engine coolant, refer to

Coolant 201 Engine oil adding 201 BMW Maintenance

System 203 checking level 199 intervals between changes,

refer to Service requirements 74

"Engine oil level" 200 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 218 Engine speed 218 Engine starting, refer to

Starting the engine 53 "Enter address" 126 Entering destination 126 Entering the address 128 Entering the intersection 127 "Entertainment" 144 "Entertainment

settings" 145, 152 Environmentally friendly

driving, refer to Energy Control 70

"Equalizer", refer to Tone control 146

Equalizer, refer to Tone control 146

Error messages, refer to Check Control 79

"ESN" 154 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 84

Event data recorders 204 Exhaust system, refer to Hot

exhaust system 116 Exterior mirrors 45 adjusting 45 automatic dimming

feature 117 automatic heating 46 External audio

device 107, 162 Eyes for tow-starting and towing

away 213 for tying down loads 119

F Fader, tone control 145 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 79 Failure of an electrical

consumer 209 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 35 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 45 Fastest route for

navigation 134 Fast forward CD changer 160 CD player 160 "Fast route" in navigation 135 Filter refer to Microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 101

First aid pouch 212

Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 52

Flashlight, refer to Rechargeable flashlight 106

Flash when locking/ unlocking 31

Flat Run-Flat Tires 196 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88 indicating a flat tire 89 initializing the system 88 malfunction 89 snow chains 88, 197 system limits 88 Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 195 "FM", waveband 144, 148 FM, waveband 148 Fog lamps 95 indicator lamp 13, 95 Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 117 Footwell lamps 96 For your own safety 5 Front airbags 90 Front seat adjustment 40 "FTM" 88 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 88 Fuel 186 display 70 high-quality brands 186 quality 186 specifications 186 tank capacity 221 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 70 Fuel consumption, refer to

Average fuel consumption 71

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 70

Fuel filler door 186 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 186 Fuses 209

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

232

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 103

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 186

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 70

Gasoline engine, checking oil level 199

Gear indicator automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Gearshift lever automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 manual transmission 54 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Gearshifts with automatic

transmission 57 with manual transmission 54 with the sequential manual

gearbox SMG 55 General driving notes 116 Glass sunroof, electric 38 anti-trapping mechanism 39 closing after electrical

malfunction 39 convenient operation 30, 32 opening, closing 38 operation with convenient

access 36 raising 38 remote control 30 Glove compartment 106 rechargeable flashlight 106 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 124 Grills 97 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 220

H Halogen lamps replacing bulbs 206 Handbrake 54 indicator lamp 54 Hand lamp, refer to

Rechargeable flashlight 106 Hands-free system 14 Hazard warning flashers 14 HD, refer to High Definition

Radio 151 Head airbags 90 Headlamp control,

automatic 93 Headlamp cover 206 Headlamp flasher 58 indicator lamp 11, 13 Headlamps care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure replacing bulbs 206 Head restraints 42 sitting safely 40 Heated mirrors 46 rear window 100 seats 43 Heating mirrors 46 rear window 100 seats 43 Heating while at a standstill,

refer to Using residual heat 99

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 119

Height, refer to Dimensions 219

Height adjustment seats 41 steering wheel 47 High beams 95 headlamp flasher 95 indicator lamp 13 replacing bulbs 206 High Definition Radio 151 High water, refer to Driving

through water 117

Highways, refer to Route criteria 135

Hills 117 Holders for cups 107 "Home address" in

navigation 134 Homepage 4 Hood 198 Horn 10 Hot exhaust system 116 "Hour memo" 78 "House number" in

destination entry 128 Hydraulic brake assist, refer to

Dynamic Brake Control 84 Hydroplaning 117

I IBOC, refer to High Definition

Radio 151 Ice warning 69 ID3 tag, refer to Information

about the track 158 iDrive 16 adjusting brightness 82 assistance window 20 automatic climate control 98 changing language 82 date and time, setting 77 displays, menus 17 menu guidance 17 operating principle 16 overview 16 selecting a menu item 19 status information 20 switching menu pages 19 symbols 18 Ignition 52 switched off 52 switched on 52 Ignition key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 28

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 52

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 52

Ignition lock 52

R e

fe re

n ce

233

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Indicator and warning lamps 13

Individual air distribution 98 Individually programmable

buttons on steering wheel 47

Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 29

Information on another location 130 on country 130 on current position 130 on destination location 130 "Information" in

navigation 131 "Information on

destination" 132 Initializing compass, refer to

Calibrating 105 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 88 glass sunroof 39 "Input map" 130 Installation location CD changer 160 Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 139

Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 96 Instrument panel, refer to

Cockpit 10 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote

control 103 Interesting destination for

navigation 130 "Interim time" 82 Interior lamps 96 remote control 30 Interior motion sensor 35 Interior rearview mirror 46 automatic dimming

feature 117 Interior rearview mirror with

digital compass 104 Interlock 57 Intermittent mode of the

wipers 59

J Jacking points 209 Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering, refer to Jump

starting 212 Jump starting 212

K Key, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 28 Keyless Go, refer to

Convenient access 35 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Convenient access 35

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 29

"Keypad" 173 Kick-down 58 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 58 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 56 Knock control 186

L Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

low beams 93 Lamps and bulbs, replacing

bulbs 205 "Languages" in

navigation 139 "Languages"on the control

display 82 Lap-and-shoulder safety

belt 45 Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 119 Last destinations, refer to

Destination list 131 "Last seat pos." 44 LATCH child-restraint fixing

system 50 LEDs light-emitting

diodes 205

Length, refer to Dimensions 219

License plate lamp, replacing bulbs 208

Light-emitting diodes LEDs 205

Lighter 108 "Lighting" 94 Lighting instruments 96 lamps and bulbs 205 of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 93 Light switch 93 "Limit" 81 Limit, refer to Speed limit 81 Loading securing cargo 119 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 119 Location drive for navigation DVD and

audio CD 124 Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 33 Locking adjusting confirmation

signal 31 from inside 33 from outside 30 without remote control, refer

to Convenient access 35 Locking and unlocking doors from inside 32 from outside 30 "LOGIC7", refer to Tone

control 146 Low beams 93 automatic 93 replacing bulbs 206 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 41

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

234

Luggage compartment capacity 220 convenient access 36 folding up the floor

panel 110 lamp 96 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 Luggage compartment lid 33 convenient access 36 unlocking with remote

control 31 Luggage compartment lid,

refer to Tailgate 33 Luggage compartment net,

refer to Securing cargo 119 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 119 Lumbar support 41

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 197 Maintenance, refer to Service

Booklet Maintenance system 203 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 79 Manual mode automatic transmission with

Steptronic 58 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 "Manual" on the radio 149 Manual operation door lock 32 glass sunroof 39 panorama glass roof 39 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 58 Manual release fuel filler door 186 Manual transmission 54 Map changing scale 138 destination entry 129 "Map direction of travel" 138 "Map facing north" 138

Master key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 28

Maximum cooling 98 Maximum speed with winter tires 197 Memory, refer to Seat and

mirror memory 44 MENU button 16 Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Microfilter BMW Maintenance

System 203 for automatic climate

control 101 Microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter BMW Maintenance

System 203 Microphone for telephone 14 Mirror dimming feature 117 Mirrors 45 automatic curb monitor 46 exterior mirrors 45 heating 46 interior rearview mirror 46 "Missed calls" 172 Missed calls 172 Mobile phone accepted calls 172 adjusting volume 170 calling 171 ending call 171 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 106 missed calls 172 operation via iDrive 170 redialing 172 refer to separate Owner's

Manual Top 8 172 touch tone dialing 173 Mobile phone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 106

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Mobile phone in the vehicle 116

Mobile phones, use inside the car, refer to Mobile phone in the vehicle 116

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive controls 16

Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88

"Monitor on / off" 47 Most recent mobile phone

numbers 172 MP3, refer to Compressed

audio files 156 Multifunctional steering

wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 58 refer to Wiper system 59 Music track finding 158 "Mute on / off" 47 Muting the TV 144

N "Navigation" 125 Navigation address home address 134 Navigation announcements,

refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 139

Navigation destination manual entry 125, 128 selecting via map 129 Navigation drive, location 124 Navigation DVD 124

R e

fe re

n ce

235

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation system 124 address book 132 destination entry 125 destination guidance in

assistance window 124 destination list 131 displaying current

position 140 entering a destination

manually 125, 128 last destinations 131 opening 125 route display 137 route list 139 searching for a special

destination 130 selecting destination using

information 130 selecting destination via

map 129 selecting route criteria 134 starting destination

guidance 136 switching off, refer to

Terminating/continuing destination guidance 136

terminating/continuing destination guidance 136

voice instructions 139 volume adjustment 139 "Navigation voice

instructions" via buttons on the steering wheel 47

Neck support, refer to Head restraints 42

Nets, refer to Storage compartments 107

"New address" in navigation 132

"New destination" 125, 129 "New route" 140 New tires 196 "Next entertainment

source" 47 North-facing map 138 Nose weight 220 Nozzles 97 Nozzles, refer to Windshield

washer nozzles 60

Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 218

O OBD socket 204 OBD socket, refer to Socket

for On-Board Diagnosis 204 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 186 Odometer 69 Oil capacity 221 Oil, refer to Engine oil 199 Oil consumption 199 Oil level 199 Old batteries, refer to

Disposal 209 "On a new destination" in

navigation 131 "Onboard info" 71 Onboard tool kit 205 "On destination" 131 "On location" 131 Opening and closing convenient access 35 from inside 32 from outside 30 using the door lock 32 via the remote control 30 Opening and unlocking from the inside 32 Operation by voice for mobile

phone 174 adjusting volume 175 canceling 174 correcting phone

number 175 dialing phone number 175 placing a call 175 redialing 176 voice commands 174 voice phone book 175 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17 Outlets refer to Ventilation 100 Output, refer to Engine

data 218

Outside-air mode automatic climate control 99 Outside-temperature

display 69 changing units of

measure 73 in computer 73 Overheated engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 69 Overriding selector lever

lock 58

P Panorama glass roof closing after electrical

malfunction 39 convenient operation 30 remote control 30 "Parked car operation" 101 "Parked car ventilation" 101 Parked car ventilation 101 Parked car ventilation/heating activating switch-on

times 102 preselecting switch-on

times 101 switching on and off

directly 101 Parking vehicle 53 Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 83 Parking brake, refer to

Handbrake 54 Parking lamps/low beams 93 replacing bulbs 207 Parts and accessories, refer to

The individual vehicle 5 Passenger-side mirror tilt

function 46 "Pathway lighting" 94 Pathway lighting 94 "PDC" 84 PDC Park Distance Control 83 Personal Profile 29 "Perspective" 138 Phone book 170

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

236

Phone numbers deleting from phone

book 173 dialing 171 most recent numbers 172 selecting in phone book 172 Top 8 172 Placing a call, refer to

telephone owner's manual "Play" for audio mode 157 "Play"

on the radio 155 Pollen refer to Microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 101

Position displaying 140 storing 132 Power failure 209 Power windows 37 safety switch 38 Power windows, refer to

Windows 37 Preselecting the switch-on

times for parked car ventilation/heating 101

"Presets", calling up on radio 148

"Presets" on the radio 154 Pressure, tires 188 Pressure monitoring, tires 88 Flat Tire Monitor 88 Protection function, refer to

Anti-trapping mechanism glass sunroof, electric 39 windows 37 Providing medical assistance,

refer to First add pouch 212 Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 88

R Radio autostore 149 controls 144 sampling stations 149 satellite radio 153 selecting the frequency

manually 149 selecting the

waveband 144, 148 station search 149 station selection 148 stations with the best

reception 149 storing stations 150 switching on/off 144 tone control 145 volume 145 Weather Band 151 Radio key, refer to Integrated

key/Remote control 28 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 52 Radio readiness 52 switched off 52 switched on 52 Rain sensor 59 "Random", random play 160 "Random all" for audio

mode 160 "Random directory" for audio

mode 160 Reading lamps 96 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 207 replacing bulbs 208 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 43 folding head restraint down

and up 43 Rear turn signals replacing bulbs 208 Rear ventilation 100 Rearview mirror, refer to

Mirrors 45 Rear window defroster 100 Rear window roller blind, refer

to Roller sun blinds 106

Rear window safety switch 38 "Received calls" 172 Receiving level of mobile

phone, refer to Status information 20

Reception radio stations 151 Rechargeable flashlight 106 Recirculated-air mode 99 Recirculation of air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 99 Reclining seat, refer to

Backrest 41 Recording times, refer to

Stopwatch 81 "Redial" for mobile phone 172 Refueling 186 Releasing hood 198 Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 70 Remote control 28 battery renewal 37 convenient access 35 garage door opener 103 luggage compartment lid 31 malfunctions 31, 36 service data 203 "Repeat directory" for audio

mode 159 "Repeat" for audio mode 159 "Repeat track" for audio

mode 159 Replacement remote

control 28 Replacing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 205 Replacing tires, refer to New

wheels and tires 196 Reporting an accident, refer to

Initiating an emergency call 211

Reporting safety defects 6 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 70 Reservoir for washer

systems 60 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 147

R e

fe re

n ce

237

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

"Reset" for stopwatch 82 "Reset" for tone settings 147 Residual heat mode 99 Restraint systems for children 49 refer to Safety belts 45 Reverse CD changer 160 CD player 160 Reverse gear automatic transmission with

Steptronic 58 manual transmission 55 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Road map 138 "Roadside Assistance" 180 Roadside

Assistance 180, 211 Roadside parking lamps 95 replacing bulbs 207 Roadworthiness test, refer to

Service requirements 74 Roller blind sun blinds 106 Roof load capacity 220 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 119 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 214 Rotary/pushbutton, refer to

iDrive 16 Route 134 bypassing sections 140 changing 134 display 137 displaying arrow view 137 displaying map view 138 displaying town 139 list 139 selecting 134 selecting criteria 134 Route selection 134 RSC Runflat System

Component, refer to Run- Flat Tires 196

Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 196

Run-Flat Tires 196 continuing driving with a

damaged tire 89 flat tire 89 new tires 196 replacing tires 196 tire pressures 188 winter tires 197 Runflat Tyres, refer to Run-

Flat Tires 196

S Safety-belt height

adjustment 45 Safety belts 45 damage 45 indicator lamp 45 reminder 45 sitting safely 40 Safety systems airbags 90 Antilock Brake System

ABS 84 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 84 safety belts 45 Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat

Tires 196 Sampling tracks scan 158 Satellite radio 153 enabling 153 selecting channel 154 storing channel 154 "SAT" for radio 144, 153 "Scan" sampling radio stations 149 sampling tracks on CD 158 Scan CD changer 158 CD player 158 radio 149 "Scan all" for audio mode 159 "Scan directory" for audio

mode 159 Screen, refer to iDrive

controls 16

Screw thread for tow fitting 213

SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 153

Seat adjustment electric 41 mechanical 41 Seat and mirror memory 44 Seat belt reminder, refer to

'Fasten safety belts' reminder 45

Seats 40 adjusting the seats 41 heating 43 sitting safely 40 Securing cargo 111 Securing the vehicle from inside 32 from outside 30 "Select as destination" 131 "Select current speed" 81 Selecting an audio source 144 Selecting distance for active

cruise control 64 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting new scale for

navigation 138 Selecting the frequency

manually 149 Selecting the route 134 Selection options with

navigation system 134 Selector lever automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Selector lever lock, refer to

Shiftlock automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Selector lever positions automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

238

Sequential manual gearbox SMG 55

acceleration assistant 57 breaking in 116 Dynamic Driving Control 56 gear indicator 55 kick-down 56 shiftlock 55 tow-starting 215 "Service" 80, 179, 200 Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 211 Service car, refer to Roadside

Assistance 211 Service data in the remote

control 203 Service Interval Display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 203

"Service notification" 179 "Service Request" 180, 182 Service requirement display,

refer to Condition Based Service CBS 203

"Service requirements" 75, 179, 200

Service requirements 74 "Service Status" 179 "Set date" 79 "Set" for audio mode 144 "Set time" 78 Settings clock, 12h/24h mode 78 date format 79 Setting times, refer to

Preselecting switch-on times 101

"Set tire pressure" 88 Shifting gears automatic transmission with

Steptronic 58 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 55 Shiftlock automatic transmission,

refer to Changing selector lever positions 57

sequential manual gearbox SMG 55

Shift paddles 56 Short commands of voice

command system 222 Shortest route in navigation,

refer to Selecting route 134 "Short route" in

navigation 135 "Show current position" 130 "Show destination

position" 130 Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 159 CD player 159 Side airbags 90 Side-mounted turn signals replacing bulbs 207 Side window blind, refer to

Roller sun blinds 106 Side windows, refer to

Windows 37 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 40 airbags 40 safety belt 40 with head restraint 40 Ski bag 111 Ski sack, refer to Ski bag 111 Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to

Glass sunroof, electric 38 Slot for remote control 52 SMG, refer to Sequential

manual gearbox 55 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 108 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Center armrest storage compartment 106

Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 108

Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD 204

Song search, refer to Playing a track 158

Sound output for entertainment on/off 144

Spare fuses 209 Spare fuses, refer to

Fuses 209

Spare key 28 adapter 28 Spark plugs, refer to Service

requirements 74 Speaking, refer to Voice

instructions for navigation system 139

Speed with winter tires 197 Speed-dependent

volume 145 Speed limit 81 setting 81 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 81 Speedometer 12 "Speed volume", refer to Tone

control 146 Sport program refer to Dynamic Driving

Control 56 Sports seat 42 Stability control, refer to

Driving stability control systems 84

Start/stop button 52 starting the engine 53 switching off the engine 53 "Start guid-

ance" 128, 132, 133, 136 Starting difficulties, temperature 53 Starting, refer to Starting the

engine 53 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 212 Starting the engine start/stop button 52 Start menu 17 "State / Province" in

destination entry 126 Station, refer to Radio 148 "Status" 75 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5

R e

fe re

n ce

239

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Steering wheel 47 adjustment 47 buttons on steering

wheel 11 freely programmable

buttons 47 lock 52 "Steering wheel buttons" 47 Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 89 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Steptronic 57

"Stopwatch" 81 Stopwatch 81 Storage compartments 107 "Store in address book" in

navigation 132 "Store" on the radio 150, 155 Storing current position 132 Storing radio stations 150 Storing seat positions, refer to

Seat and mirror memory 44 Storing tires 197 Stowage, refer to Storage

compartments 107 "Street" in destination

entry 127 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 188 Sun blinds 106 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 53 Switching off the engine start/stop button 52 Switching on audio 144 CD changer 144 CD player 144 radio 144 Switching on the hour

signal 78 Switching the cooling function

on and off 100 Symbols 4 Control Display 20

T Tachometer 69 Tailgate locking or unlocking

separately 33 opening and closing 33 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 Tail lamps 207 replacing bulbs 208 Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 221 Technical data 218 Technical modifications 5 Telematik, refer to

TeleService, BMW Assist 178

Telephone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 106 refer to separate Owner's

Manual Telephone, refer to Mobile

phone 166 "Telephone list" 47 TeleService 178 enabling 178 services offered 179 Temperature adjustments automatic climate control 98 Temperature display ice warning 69 outside temperature 69 setting the units 73 Temperature of the coolant,

refer to Coolant temperature 69

Tensioning straps, refer to Securing cargo 119

"Terminate services" 181 "Text language" 82 "Theater" tone settings 146 The individual vehicle 5 Thigh support 42 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 208 Tilt alarm sensor 35

Tilt function, passenger-side mirror 46

"Time" 78 "Time format" 78 Timer, refer to Preselecting

switch-on times 101 "Timer 1" for parked car

ventilation/heating 101 "Timer 2" for parked car

ventilation/heating 101 Tire inflation pressures 188 Tire pressure loss 89 Tire pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 88 Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 89 Tire Quality Grading 194 Tires age 194, 196 breaking in 116 changing, refer to Changing

wheels 209 condition 195 damage 195 inflation pressure 188 minimum tread depth 195 new tires 196 pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 88 puncture 89 Run-Flat Tires 196 size 194 wear indicators, refer to

Minimum tread depth 195 winter tires 197 "Tone" 145 Tone in audio mode adjusting 145 middle setting 147 Tools, refer to Onboard tool

kit 205 "Top 8" for mobile phone 172 Torque 218 Touch tone dialing 173 Tow bar 214 Tow fitting screw thread 213 Tow fittings 213

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

-Z

240

Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 213

Towing 213 methods 214 Towing away car with automatic

transmission 213 "Town / City" in destination

entry 126 Tow rope 214 Tow-starting 213 sequential manual gearbox

SMG 215 Tracks random play sequence 159 Track width, refer to

Dimensions 219 Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC 84 Traction control, refer to DSC

Dynamic Stability Control 84

Trailer towing towing loads and gross

weight 220 Transmission automatic transmission with

Steptronic 57 manual transmission 54 overriding selector lever lock

for automatic transmission with Steptronic 58

sequential manual gearbox SMG 55

Transporting children safely 49

Transport securing device, refer to Securing cargo 119

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 195

Treble, refer to Tone control 145

Treble, refer to Treble and bass 145

Treble, tone control 145 "Trip computer" 72 Trip computer 71 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 69

"Triple turn signal activation" 59

Triple turn signal activation 59 Trip odometer 69 Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 33 Trunk lamp, refer to Luggage

compartment lamp 96 Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 33 Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 219 Turn signals 58 indicator lamp 12 replacing bulbs 207 Tying down loads, refer to

Cargo loading 119

U Underbody protection, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 194

"Units" 74 Units average consumption 73 temperature 73 Universal garage door opener,

refer to Integrated universal remote control 103

Universal remote control 103 Unlatching, refer to

Unlocking 35 "Unlock button" 30 Unlocking from inside 32 from outside 30 luggage compartment lid 36 without remote control, refer

to Convenient access 35 "Update services" 181

V Vehicle battery 209 breaking in 116 care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure cargo loading 118 dimensions 219 Identification Number, refer

to Engine compartment 199 parking 53 washing, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure weight 220 Vehicle jack 209 Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current position 140

"Vehicle settings" 88 Ventilation 100 draft-free 100 in the rear 100 Ventilation while at a

standstill 101 Vents, refer to Ventilation 100 "Vent settings" 98 Voice commands overview 22 short commands 222 Voice instructions for

navigation system 139 muting 48, 139 repeating 48, 139 switching on/off 139 volume 139 Voice phone book 175 Volume 144 audio sources 144 mobile phone 170 speed-dependent

adjustment 145 voice instructions 139

W Warning and indicator

lamps 13

R e

fe re

n ce

241

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 79

Warning triangle 212 Washer fluid 60 content of the reservoir 60 Washer fluid reservoir 60 Washing the car, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 107

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 117

Waveband with the radio 148 "WB" 144, 151 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 195 Weather Band 151 Webpage 4 Weights 220 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 219 Wheels, new 196 Wheels and tires 188 Width, refer to

Dimensions 219 Windows 37 anti-trapping mechanism 37 convenience operation 30 opening, closing 37 operation with convenient

access 36 safety switch 38 Windows, indicator on Control

Display 16 Window washer fluid

reservoir, refer to Washer fluid 60

Window washer system 59 washer fluid 60 washer nozzles 60 Windshield cleaning 60 defrosting and removing

condensation 100 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 205 Windshield wipers, refer to

Wiper system 59

Winter tires 197 setting speed limit 81 storage 197 Wiper blade replacement 205 Wiper system 59 "With highways" for

navigation 135 Word-matching principle for

navigation 135 Work in the engine

compartment 198 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to

Onboard tool kit 205

X Xenon lamps replacing bulbs 206

Refueling So that you always have access to the data you need when refueling, you are recommended to enter the relevant figures for your car in the table provided below. Consult the index for indi- vidual specifications.

Fuel

Engine oil

Do not add engine oil until the corresponding warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up, refer to page 201.

Tire inflation pressures

Designation

Please enter your preferred fuel here.

Quality

Summer tires Front Rear

Winter tires Front Rear

Up to 4 persons

5 persons or 4 plus luggage

<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 3 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 3 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 3 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 325i Sedan 3 Series 2006 Owner's Manual Universal as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.